2010 Cadillac SRX Owners Manual

Black plate (1,1)Cadillac SRX Owner Manual - 2010

2010 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1Additional Storage Features . . . 3-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-41OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46Universal Remote System . . . . 4-48

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-36Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-25Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-34Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-40Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-61


2010 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109

Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 10-9

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-14Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLACCrest and Wreath, and the nameSRX are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors LLC.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forCadillac Motor Car Divisionwherever it appears in this manual.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25823383 C Third Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-17Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 1-19

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 1-22Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-22Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27


1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keyless access transmitter isdangerous for many reasons,children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows orother controls or even make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keyless accesstransmitter in the vehicle and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keylessaccess transmitter in a vehiclewith children.

This key, located inside the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, isused for the driver door andglove box.

To remove the key, press the buttonnear the bottom of the transmitter,and pull the key out. Never pull thekey out without pressing the button.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

Contact Roadside Service if you arelocked out of the vehicle. SeeRoadside Service on page 12‑6.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions will work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking, see “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization. If thepassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock.



Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 1‑17.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors, see “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.When remotely unlocking thevehicle at night the fog lamps andreverse lamps will come on forabout 20 seconds to light yourapproach to the vehicle. The turnsignal indicators may flash and/orthe horn may sound to indicateunlocking. See “Unlock Feedback”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41.

Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See “Memory Remote Recall” underVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41 for more information.

On some models, pressing andholding K will open all of thevehicle's windows. See PowerWindows on page 1‑24.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 1‑17.

/ (Remote Start): For vehicleswith this feature, press Q and then

press and hold/ withinthree seconds to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle using theRKE transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 1‑9 foradditional information.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and holdL forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signal lamps flash for30 seconds, or untilL is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

& (Remote Liftgate Release):Press until the liftgate begins tomove to open or close the powerliftgate.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have the keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe liftgate without removing theremote transmitter from your pocket,purse, briefcase, etc. The keylessentry transmitter must be within 1 m(3 feet) of the door being opened.If the vehicle has this feature, therewill be a body colored touch pad onthe outside front door handles.

Keyless Unlocking

With the transmitter within 1 m(3 feet), approach the front door andpull the handle. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause all ofthe doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver’s door is opened,see “Passive Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.



Keyless Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the vehicle isturned off and all doors becomeclosed, the vehicle will determinehow many keyless accesstransmitters remain in the vehicleinterior. If at least one keylessaccess transmitter has beenremoved from the interior of thevehicle, the doors will lock afterseveral seconds.

If there are two keyless accesstransmitters in the vehicle andone is removed, the other will belocked in. A person approaching theoutside of the locked vehicle withoutan authorized keyless accesstransmitter will not be able to openthe door, even with the transmitterin the vehicle.

You may temporarily disable thekeyless locking feature by pressingand holding the power door unlockbutton on the instrument panel forseveral seconds with a door open.Keyless locking will then remaindisabled until the door lock switch ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

To customize whether the doorsautomatically lock when you exit thevehicle, see “Passive Locking”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41.

Lock Sensor

When all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on thedoor handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.



Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the liftgatehandle to open the liftgate if thekeyless entry transmitter is withinrange.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only keyless entry transmittersprogrammed to the vehicle will work.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmittersno longer work. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within ten seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY TOLEARN ELECTRONICKEY #2, 3, 4, ETC.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats. Thestorage area will need to beopened and the storage traylifted up to access thetransmitter pocket.



4. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 5 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within ten seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for ten minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.



4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is inside thecenter console storage arealocated between the driver andfront passenger seats. Thestorage area will need to beopened and the storage traylifted up to access thetransmitter pocket.

5. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned the DICdisplay will show that it is readyto program the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 5 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display “No RemoteDetected” when you try to start thevehicle. The REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY message mayalso be displayed at this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the START button.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

1. Press the button near the bottomof the transmitter and pull thekey out. 2. Use the key blade to separate

the two halves of the transmitter.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will automaticallychange to a heating or coolingmode depending on the outsidetemperature during a remote start.When the ON/RUN/START ignitionmode is selected , the climatecontrol system will return to itssetting from when the vehicle waslast turned off.



Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 1‑3for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

2. Within three seconds, press andhold/ until the turn signallamps flash. This confirms therequest to remote start thevehicle has been received. If thevehicle' s lamps are not visible,press and hold/ for at leasttwo seconds.

During the remote start thevehicle's doors will be lockedand the parking lamps willremain on as long as the engineis running.

3. Press the brake pedal and selectthe ON/RUN/START ignitionmode to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the ignitionis put in ON/RUN/START.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10 minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canonly be extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minute period willstart immediately.

For example, if the vehicle has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must bechanged to ON/RUN/START andthen back to OFF before the remotestart procedure can be used again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To cancel a remote start:

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate if:. The ignition is in any mode other

than OFF.. The transmitter is in the vehicle.. The hood is not closed.



. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

So, all passengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be locked wheneverthe vehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter from the outside.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switches arelocated on the instrument panel.

K (Unlock): Press (A) to unlockthe doors.

Q (Lock): Press (B) to lock thedoors.



Lockout Deterrent

Lockout deterrent decreases thechances that the keys may beaccidentally locked in the vehicle.

When door locking is requested bypressing Q on the instrument panel

or Q on the keyless accesstransmitter and the driver door isopen, all doors will lock and thedriver door will immediately unlock.The driver door must be closedwhen Q is pressed for all doors toremain locked.

This feature can be programmed toprovide the lockout deterrent featureonly when the ignition mode is ACC/ACCESSORY, or ON/RUN/START.See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.

Delayed Locking

When this feature is enabled andthe doors are locked with the powerlock switch on the instrument panel,three chimes sound to signal thatthe delayed locking feature is inuse. All doors lock five secondsafter the last door is closed.

When the delayed locking feature isin use, pressing Q on the

instrument panel or Q on thekeyless access transmitter willoverride the feature and lock alldoors immediately.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock” inVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41. The delayed lockingfeature is only available if “UnlockedDoor Anti-Lockout” is disabled.

Safety Locks

Rear door security locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

Press the button (C) to activate thesafety locks. Once activated, theLED light in the switch illuminates.

Pressing the button againdeactivates the safety locks.

See Power Door Locks onpage 1‑11.



Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8‑24.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

For vehicles without keyless access,unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.



Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


On vehicles with a power liftgate theswitch is located on the driver door.The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampsflash when the power liftgatemoves.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.



Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch untilthe indicator lines up with thedesired position.

The three modes are:

MAX : The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4 : The liftgate power opens to areduced open height that can be setby the vehicle operator in a range ofapproximately 3/4 open to full open.Use this setting to prevent theliftgate from opening into overheadobstructions such as a garage dooror roof mounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still beopened fully manually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than with a standardmanual liftgate.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. Pressing& on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 1‑3 .

. Pressing& on the center ofthe mode switch on the driverdoor, with the driver doorunlocked.

. Pressing the touchpad switch onthe liftgate outside handle, withall doors unlocked, to open theliftgate.

Press and release& on theliftgate adjacent to the latch to closethe liftgate.

Pressing any liftgate button, or thetouchpad switch while the liftgate ismoving, stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE switch again reverses thedirection. There is a minimumdistance that the power liftgate mustalready be open for the system tohold it open. If movement is stoppedbelow that minimum, the liftgatecloses.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.



The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled underextreme temperatures or lowbattery conditions. If this occurs,the liftgate can still be operatedmanually.

If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the openposition. Cargo could fall out of thevehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flashand a chime sounds. The liftgatestays open temporarily, then slowlycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound andthe liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed oropen position. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.The Power Liftgate Unavailablewarning message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate willresume normal power operation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the Power Liftgate3/4 Mode

To change the liftgate stop position:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the 3/4 modeposition and power open theliftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate switch. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifrequired.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened with the3/4 mode selected, the liftgate stopsat the new set position.



If you do not hear the audible andvisual feedback when setting theintermediate stop position, you areattempting to set the height belowthe 3/4 open height minimum(approximately 5 feet). The liftgatecannot be set below that minimumand the new setting will not berecorded.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually opened andclosed. Manual efforts of a vehicleequipped with a power liftgate willbe higher than a standardnon-power liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. With the power liftgatedisabled, the liftgate electric latchwill still power latch once contact ismade with the striker. Always closethe liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, theturn signals flash and the liftgatewill not move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate willnot open. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do notmake it impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The LED light, located on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the statusof the system.

Arming the System

To arm the system,

1. Close all doors, liftgateand hood.

2. Lock the vehicle using thetransmitter, or the power doorlock button. The LED on theinstrument panel should comeon and stay on for about30 seconds.



3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm, and the LEDwill begin to slowly flashindicating the alarm is operating.

If a door, the hood, or liftgate isopened without first unlocking withthe transmitter, the vehicle’s turnsignals will flash and the horn willsound for about 30 seconds. Thealarm system will then re-arm tomonitor for the next unauthorizedevent.

The theft-deterrent alarm systemwill not activate if the doors arelocked with the vehicle's key.You can start the vehicle with arecognized transmitter in thevehicle if the alarm has beenset off.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, either unlockthe doors using the transmitter,or start the vehicle with arecognized transmitter in thevehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with thetransmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will not disarm thealarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing theunlock button on the transmitter.The alarm will not stop if you try tounlock a door any other way.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsthree times, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, the“Theft Attempted” message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 4‑37 foradditional information.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the pushbuttonstart is activated to enter theACC/ACCESSORY mode or theON/RUN/START mode and a validtransmitter is present in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or morekeyless entry transmitters that arematched to an immobilizer controlunit in your vehicle. Only a correctlymatched keyless entry transmitterwill start the vehicle. If the keylessentry transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not changeignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, OFF), and thekeyless entry transmitter appears tobe undamaged, try another keylessentry transmitter. Or, you may tryplacing the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket located in thecenter console. See “No RemoteDetected” under Key and LockMessages on page 4‑37.



If the ignition modes will not changewith the other transmitter, yourvehicle needs service. If the ignitiondoes change modes, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew keyless entry transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeyless entry transmitters. Up toeight keyless entry transmitters canbe programmed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional transmitters, see“Programming Transmitters to theVehicle” Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 1‑3 .

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirror:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror to thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to thecenter position.



Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

Vehicles with manual fold mirrorsare folded inward toward the vehicleto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.Push the mirror outward to return itto the original position.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

Vehicles with power folding mirrorshave controls located on thedriver door.

To fold the mirrors:

1. With the selector switch in theO position, push the control paddown arrow. Both mirrors willautomatically fold.

2. Press the control pad downarrow again to return the mirrorsto their original position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors do not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A noise may be heard during theresetting of the power foldawaymirrors. This sound is normal aftera manual folding operation.



Heated Mirrors< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 7‑1 for moreinformation.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This featureautomatically tilts the outside mirrorsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the driver to view the curbfor parallel parking.

The passenger and driver mirrorsreturn to their original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on oroff through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center and move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information aboutthe services OnStar provides.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time thevehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information aboutthe services OnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keyless access transmitter isdangerous for many reasons,children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows orother controls or even make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keyless accesstransmitter in the vehicle and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keylessaccess transmitter in a vehiclewith children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

Driver side shown

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows.

The power windows:. Can be operated with the

ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN/START.

. Can be operated within10 minutes of switching theignition off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 8‑20.

. Will stop operation when anydoor is opened.

Operate the switch for the desiredwindow by pressing to open andpulling to close.

Pushing or pulling the switch partof the way will open or close thewindow as long as the switch isoperated.



Express‐Down/Up Windows

Windows that have theexpress‐down/up feature allowthe windows to be lowered andraised fully without holding thewindow switch. Press the windowswitch fully and release it to activatethe express‐down feature. Pull thewindow switch fully up and releaseit to activate the express‐upfeature.The express mode can becanceled at any time by brieflypressing, or pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming the power windowsmay be necessary if the vehicle'sbattery has been disconnected ordischarged

If the window will not express upafter power has been restored and amessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Center:

1. Close all doors

2. Place the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN/START.

3. From any partial open position,close the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully closed.

Obstacle Detection Feature

The Obstacle Detection Feature ispart of the express-up feature and isactive:

1. In the middle and upper portionsof the window opening.

2. During window up movements.

3. In ignition OFF during all windowup movements and duringexpress-up window movementsin ignition ON/RUN/START.

If there is something blocking thewindow during automatic closing,the window will reverse directionfor a short distance. Weatherconditions such as extreme coldand/or ice may cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once the objector condition is removed.



If conditions prevent the windowfrom closing and the windowcontinues to auto-reverse, it ispossible to close the window withthe ignition in ON/RUN/START byholding the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.Release of the switch from thepartially pulled up position will causethe window to stop. Release of theswitch from the fully pulled upposition will activate the express-upand related obstacle detectionfeatures.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedlyoperated within a short time, thewindow operation is disabled for ashort time.

Opening the Windows FromOutside the Vehicle

The vehicle may have remoteoperating windows that can beopened from outside the vehicle bypressing and holding the unlockbutton on the Keyless AccessTransmitter to open all the windows.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout switch is located on thedriver door. This feature preventsthe rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to turnthe lockout feature on or off. Anindicator light shows the featureis on.



Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it along therod from side-to-side to cover thedriver or passenger side of the frontwindow. Swing the sun visor to theside to cover the side window. It canbe moved along the rod fromside-to-side in this position also.

Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.The ignition must be in ON/RUN/START, ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 8‑18 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 8‑20.

A. Sunroof Switch

B. Sunshade Switch

Press the back of the sunroofswitch (A) to open the sunroof.When the switch is pressed tothe first stop the sunroof will opento the vent position. Press theswitch to the second stop toexpress open the sunroof to anautomatically adjusted comfortposition.



Press the switch to the second stopagain to open the glass further, upto the full open position. If moreventing is needed when the sunroofis open, adjust the sunroof to thecomfort position or open one of thewindows slightly.

Press the front of the switch to closethe sunroof. The first stop will closethe sunroof at a desired position atnormal speed, and the second stopwill express close the roof.

Do not keep the sunroof open forlong periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Excessivedebris may collect in the tracks andpossibly plug the water drainingsystem.

Press the back of the sunshadeswitch (B) to open the sunshade.Press the front of the switch to thefirst stop to close the sunshade to adesired position at a normal speed.Press the switch forward to thesecond stop to express close thesunshade.

Fully close the glass before fullyclosing the sunshade.

Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front orrear of the sunroof switch (A) toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the tracks thatcould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise or plug the waterdrainage system. Periodically openthe sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.


Seats and Restraints 2-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 2-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 2-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-26Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-26Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-30When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-41

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-42Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-48Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-50Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-59


2-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in alloutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.



1. To raise or lower the headrestraint, press the releasebutton while pulling up orpushing down on the headrestraint.

2. Release the button then pull upor push down on the headrestraint to make sure it islocked in place.

The front head restraints aredesigned not to be removed.

Rear Seats

The rear seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it.

2. To lower the head restraint,press the release button whilepushing the head restraint down.

3. Release the button.

4. Push down on the head restraintto make sure it is locked inplace.

The center seating position has anintegrated headrest that can beadjusted the same way as the headrestraints.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 2‑52.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjusta manual driver seat whilethe vehicle is moving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Pull the handle located at thefront of the seat.

2. Move the seat forward orbackward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

Power Seat Adjustment

Driver Seat Shown

A. Power Seat Adjustment

B. Seatback Adjustment

C. Lumbar Adjustment

On vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are on the outboard side ofthe seats.

Adjust the power seat by moving thecontrol (A) forward or rearward. Thefront or rear of the seat can be



adjusted up or down by movingthe front or rear of the control upand down.

Adjust the seatback by moving thecontrol (B) forward or rearward. SeeReclining Seatbacks on page 2‑7for more information.

Adjust the lumbar support by usingthe control (C). See LumbarAdjustment on page 2‑6 formore information.

Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the outboardside of the driver seat are used tosave and recall memory settings forthe driver seat, outside mirrors, andadjustable throttle and brake pedals,if the vehicle has this feature.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and pedals, if available.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory).

3. While holding MEM,press “1” until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat for a second driverusing “2.”

To recall the memory positions,press and hold “1” or “2.” The driverseat, outside mirrors, and adjustablepedals, if available, move to thestored positions. Releasing “1” or“2” before the stored position isreached stops the recall.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if available, to storedpositions when entering the vehicle.

To activate memory remote recall,unlock the driver door with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter, and open the driverdoor. On vehicles equipped withKeyless Access, opening the driverdoor will activate the recall. If thedriver door is already open,pressing the unlock button on thetransmitter will activate the recall.The driver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if available, move to thememory position associated with thetransmitter used to unlock thevehicle. Every time the ignition isplaced in OFF, the positions of thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if available, are stored to thekeyless entry transmitter used tostart the vehicle.

The automatic recall feature can beturned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menu. See “RemoteMemory Recall” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41 formore information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls, or theadjustable pedal switch, if available.



If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedals,if available, while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit driver seat featurecan move the seat rearward to allowextra room to exit the vehicle.

To activate the easy exit driver seat,place the ignition in OFF and openthe driver door. If the driver door isalready open, placing the ignition inOFF will activate the easy exitdriver seat.

Easy exit driver seat can beturned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menu. See “EasyExit Driver Seat” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41 formore information.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls, or theadjustable pedal switch, if available.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Seats with power lumbar havecontrols located on the outboardside of the seats. See Power SeatAdjustment on page 2‑4 for moreinformation.

Adjust lumbar support by using therocker switch on the outboard sideof the driver seat.

Release the switch when theseatback reaches the desiredlevel of lumbar support.



Thigh SupportAdjustment

On vehicles with this feature, adjustthe manual leg extension by pullingup on the lever, pulling or pushingon the support to lengthen orshorten it. Release the lever to lockit in place.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

Vehicles with manual recliningseatbacks have a lever on theoutboard side of the seat. Lift thelever and move the seatback to thedesired position, then release thelever. The seatback should notmove when pushed or pulled.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with power recliningseatbacks, the switch is located onthe outboard side of the seat. SeePower Seat Adjustment onpage 2‑4 for more information.



Move the switch forward or rearwardto adjust the seatback.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifyour vehicle is moving.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



On vehicles with heated front seats,the buttons are on the centerconsole. To operate the heatedseats the ignition must be inON/RUN/START.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then to the off setting. Thelights indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, theheated seats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the button to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights onthe button do not turn on during aremote start.

The heated seat temperatureperformance of an unoccupied seatmay be reduced. This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 1‑9 and “Remote Start AutoHeated Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41 formore information.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 2‑8.

On vehicles with the heated andventilated seat feature, the controlsare on the center console. Tooperate the heated and ventilatedseats the ignition must be inON/RUN/START.

Press M to heat the seat or { tocool the seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. They are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe button to use the heated orventilated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights on the button do notturn on during a remote start.

The heated seat temperatureperformance of an unoccupied seatmay be reduced. This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 1‑9and “Remote Start Auto HeatedSeats” or “Remote Start Auto SeatCool” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 4‑41 for more information.



Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

With this feature, either side of therear seatback can be folded downfor more cargo space.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Folding the Seatbacks

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. The rear safety belts must beunbuckled and the frontseatbacks are not reclined.

2. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

3. Lift the lever located on the topof the seatback. The rear seatlock indicator (A) extends whenthe seatback is unlocked.

4. Fold the seatback forward. Therear seat lock indicator (A)retracts when the seatback islocked.

Keep the seat in the upright, lockedposition when not in use.



Raising the Seatbacks

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the lever located on top ofthe seatback. Raise theseatback and release the lever.The rear seat lock indicator (A)extends when the seatback isunlocked.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward until itlocks in the upright position. Therear seat lock indicator (A)retracts when the seatback islocked.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever located ontop of the seatback. The rearseat lock indicator (A) extendswhen the seatback is unlocked.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever when theseatback is in the desiredposition. The rear seat lockindicator (A) retracts when theseatback is locked.

Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 2‑8.

On vehicles with heated rear seats,the switches are located on theRear Seat Audio (RSA) controls.

With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,press either button L for thecorresponding seat. The LED lightilluminates when the feature is on.

Only the outboard seats are heated.

An indicator on the RSA screenturns on and the seat cushion andseatback heat up. With each pressof the switch the heated seatchanges to the next lower settingand then off. The bars indicate threefor the highest setting and one forthe lowest.



Rear SeatPass-Through Door

The vehicle may have a rear seatpass-through door located in thecenter of the rear seatback. Folddown the center armrest and pushdown on the latch to open the door.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 4‑17 for additionalinformation.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.



A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 2‑43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 2‑45. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou. The lap part of the beltshould be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs.

In a crash, this applies force to thestrong pelvic bones and you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose.It will not give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.




A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.




A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 2‑26.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, just push thebutton on the buckle. For outboardseating positions, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbingwhen the safety belt is not in use.The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off the shoulder.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety beltin a crash.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without pressing the releasebutton (A) to make sure it haslocked into position. Press therelease button to lower the heightadjuster.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash and will deploy in side,rear and rollover events if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 2‑27.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides for the outboardpassenger positions in the rear seat.If not, they are available throughyour dealer. The guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, and properly adjusted,the comfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back into its storagepocket located on the side ofthe seat.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 4‑17 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 2‑27.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4‑18.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehicle thereis still an active frontal airbag in theright side of the instrument panel.Do not place cargo in front of thisairbag.

{ WARNING

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 2‑30 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑11.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 2‑32.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 2‑43 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 2‑45.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4‑18 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.



Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 2‑28.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags will



inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

If the vehicle does not have a rightfront passenger seat and a rearseat, only the driver frontal airbagwill deploy in a frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were. For

frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,

there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.



Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 2‑32 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑33.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.



You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough toinflate the airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 12‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 12‑16.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you are

using remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4‑19.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag(s) are off. If you securea forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate a rear‐facing child restraint, a rear‐facingchild restraint should not beinstalled in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4‑19.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4‑18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer to“Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position ”under Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) on page 2‑57 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 2‑59.



5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. Ifthis happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 2‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer.

If no rear seat is available, do notinstall a child restraint in thisvehicle.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2‑41 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 12‑13.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, airbagwiring, or cargo restraint systemand convenience net can affectthe operation of the airbagsystem.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 2‑36.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 9‑70 for additionalimportant information.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 4‑18 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 2‑33. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.



If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on when you are driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4‑18 for moreinformation.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for that

booster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 2‑22 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 2‑22.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.



Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

restraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. Ifyou must secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far backas it will go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 2‑52 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2‑36 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in thevehicle, even if the airbag is off.



Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat,review the following illustrations.

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

C. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCH

seating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.



Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are located underthe covers, on the back of the rearseatback. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 2‑50 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

anchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does nothave lower anchors, securethe child restraint with the toptether and the safety belts.

Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchorand open its cover toexpose the anchor.



2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the rear outboard seatingposition you are using hasan adjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

If the rear outboard seatingposition you are using hasan adjustable head restraintand you are using a singletether, raise the headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and in betweenthe head restraint posts.

If the rear center seatingposition you are using hasan adjustable headrest andyou are using a dual tether,lower the headrest down toits stowed position androute the tether over theheadrest.



If the rear center seatingposition you are using hasan adjustable headrest andyou are using a singletether, lower the headrestto its stowed position androute the tether over theheadrest.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2‑52 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 2‑50.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑52 for moreinformation.

7. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 2‑50.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 2‑36 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 4‑19 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2‑36 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear‐facing child restraint, arear‐facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 2‑52 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4‑19.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked,repeat Steps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regrading the useof the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2‑52 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 2‑36 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 3-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

The glove box is air conditioned andcan be used to store items at alower temperature. The vehicle airconditioning must be turned on forthe maximum cool air to enter the

glove box. Move the slide controlacross the small hole to turn thecool air flow off. Close the openingto keep cold air from entering thevehicle.

Cupholders

This vehicle has a cupholderequipped with a divider that can beadjusted to accommodate largecontainers or small containers.


3-2 Storage

For large containers, push thebutton to move aside the divider andmake the cupholder deeper. Forsmall containers, push down on thetop edge of the divider to lock itback in place to make the cupholdershorter.

Front Storage

A storage area is located in front ofthe shift lever. Push upward on thetop of the door and release. Thedoor automatically opens.

There is an accessory power outlet.See Power Outlets on page 4‑11.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the rear seat armrestforward to access cupholders withremovable liners and a storagearea. Pull the lever to access thestorage area.

Center Console StorageVehicles have an armrest and anupper storage tray in the centerconsole.

The armrest on top of the centerconsole can be adjusted to arearward, middle, and forwardposition. Slide the top of the armrestto adjust to the desired position.

To open the center console witharmrest, move the armrest to the fullrearward position to access thebuttons.

For either center console, thestorage area has a storage tray anda main storage. Push the driver side

button to access the storage tray.Push the passenger side button toaccess the main storage.

There is an accessory power outletand input jacks for auxiliary audiodevices. See Power Outlets onpage 4‑11 and Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD ) on page 6‑28or Auxiliary Devices (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM) on page 6‑34.

Push the button to open the storagearea located at the rear of thecenter console.


Storage 3-3

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with the dual positioncargo cover, it can be used to coveritems in the cargo area of thevehicle.

Install the cargo cover

1. Hold the cartridge so that thepull‐out shade faces the rear ofthe vehicle.

2. Align the cartridge over the pinson the trim panels of the vehicle.

3. Push down on the cartridge tosnap it into place.

4. Unroll the shade towards therear of the vehicle.

5. The shade can be set in twopositions. It can be set in a halfway open (A) position for loadingobjects into the rearcompartment.

6. Pull cargo cover down tolower (B) position to concealobjects in the rear compartment.

7. Align the pins with the channelson both sides.


3-4 Storage

8. Insert the shade's pin into thebent slot (B) and slide it to thefirst stop (C) to totally concealthe cargo area. The shade canalso be positioned at secondstop (A) to partially cover cargo.

Remove the cargo cover

1. Remove the cover from thechannels and carefully roll itback up.

2. Slide the button on the top torelease the cartridge.

3. Pull up to remove the cartridgefrom the pins.

{ WARNING

An improperly stored cargo covercould be thrown about the vehicleduring a collision or suddenmaneuver. Someone could beinjured. If the cover is removed,always store it in the properstorage location. When it isreplaced, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

Cargo Tie DownsFor vehicles equipped with cargotie‐downs, the four tie-downs arelocated in the rear compartment ofthe vehicle. Use the tie-downs tosecure small loads.


Storage 3-5

Cargo ManagementSystem

To open the cargo managementsystem, press on the bottom ofhandle assembly to unlatch it and liftup on the handle.

A prop rod locks to hold the coverup when opened.

Four hooks are located on theinside cover and can be used orstoring items.

There may be additional storagecompartments on each side of thecargo management system. Lift thepanel up to open.

Press the red push button (B) on theprop rod to close the cover.


3-6 Storage

Storing the Cargo ManagementSystem Cover

Access the rear areas of the cargomanagement system:

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover leftin the open position, could bethrown about the vehicle duringa crash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured. Besure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

1. Open the cover.

2. Release the prop rod from theinside cover by slidingdownward on the red clip (A).

Unhook the prop rod from thepin on the inside cover. Store theunhooked prop rod by folding itinto the cargo managementcompartment.

3. Store the cargo managementsystem cover by hooking it ontothe weatherstrip.


Storage 3-7

D-Ring Sliders

There are four D-Ring sliders thatmove along rails on both sides ofthe cargo management area. thesecan be used as tie-downs whenstoring cargo.

Installing D-Ring Sliders

To install the D-Ring sliders (A),insert it into the channel (B) locatedin the middle of both rails.

The loop of the D-Ring slider mustbe facing inward towards thestorage area and the ring must be inthe up position for proper usage.

Push the button to move the D-Ringslider either towards the front or therear of the vehicle. The rings can belocked into various positions alongthe rail.

U-Rail

For vehicles with a U-Rail system,move the gate around the u-shapedtrack to store and secure cargo inplace.


3-8 Storage

Storing the U-Rail Gate

Remove the gate from the U-Rail bypressing the button and liftingupward.

1. Lift the cargo managementsystem cover.

2. Release the cover from the proprod as described in previoussteps.

3. Insert the top of the gate into thelower two clips (A).

4. Flip the bottom of the gate upand insert into the upper twoclips (B).

Cargo Net

{ WARNING

Do not stack items higher thanthe upper end of the cargo net orhang anything from the net. Avoiditems that have sharp edges orthat apply excessive force to thenet. If items are not properlystored, damage to the net couldoccur and items can be thrownabout the vehicle. You or othercould be injured. Always storeitems behind the net.

For vehicles equipped with a cargonet, it can be used to store lightloads, keeping them from fallingover or being thrown into the cabinduring heavy braking.

The net should not be overloaded orused to store heavy loads.


Storage 3-9

There are four openings in theheadliner, two located behind thefront seats and two behind the rearseats.

1. Insert the top corners of thecargo net into the large openingin the headliner and secure bysliding them into the smallopening.

2. The rear seat backs shouldbe folded down, when the netis installed in the headlineropening located behind thefront seats.

3. Mount the cargo net to the rearseat tethers located on the backof the folded down rear seatsand pull on the straps to tightenthe net.

4. When the net is installed in theheadliner opening locatedbehind the rear seats, the rearseat backs should be upright.

5. Mount the cargo net to the cargotie-downs located on the lowerside panels.


3-10 Storage

6. Pull on the straps to tightenthe net.

Cargo Net Storage

The cargo net can be removed fromthe vehicle and stored in the cargomanagement system.

1. Disconnect the net from the roofopenings and the tethers.

2. Press the red button on thecenter of the net to fold it in half.

3. Roll up the cargo net, storing itinto the attached vinyl bag.

4. Open the cargo managementsystem lid.

5. For vehicles with an inflator kit,store the cargo net in theavailable space next to the kit.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie-downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.


Storage 3-11

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items. Forroof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss ofcargo when driving, check to makesure cross rails and cargo aresecurely fastened. Loading cargoon the roof rack will make thevehicle’s center of gravity higher.

Avoid high speeds, sudden starts,sharp turns, sudden braking orabrupt maneuvers, otherwise it mayresult in loss of control. If driving fora long distance, on rough roads,or at high speeds, occasionally stopthe vehicle to make sure the cargoremains in its place. Do not exceedthe maximum vehicle capacity whenloading the vehicle. For moreinformation on vehicle capacity andloading, see Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11.


3-12 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instruments andControls

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Clock (Analog Clock) . . . . . . . . 4-10Clock (Digital Clock) . . . . . . . . . 4-10Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . 4-16Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only) . . . . 4-16Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-17Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-18Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-20MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 4-25Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-25

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-26Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 4-27Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-27Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-28Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 4-28Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-29Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29


4-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Brake System Messages . . . . 4-34Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-34Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-34Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-35Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-36Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-36Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-36Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-37Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-39Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-39

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-39Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-40Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 4-41

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-41

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 4-48Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52



2 NOTES



Instrument Panel Overview



A. Air Vents on page 7‑6.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 5‑5 . DriverInformation Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑29.

C. Cruise Control on page 8‑37.

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 4‑14.

E. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 4‑6 .

F. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11.

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Display. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑29.

H. Clock (Analog Clock) onpage 4‑10 or Clock (DigitalClock) on page 4‑10.

I. Safety Locks on page 1‑12.Power Door Locks onpage 1‑11. Hazard WarningFlashers on page 5‑5.

J. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 5‑1 . Front Fog Lampson page 5‑6 (If Equipped).Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 5‑6.

K. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 4‑6 .

L. Horn on page 4‑7.

M. Start/Stop Button. See Startingthe Gasoline Engine onpage 8‑20.

N. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 4‑7 . Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 4‑9.

O. Heated Front Seats onpage 2‑8 (If Equipped).Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 2‑10(If Equipped).

P. Parking Brake on page 8‑31.

Q. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 8‑22.

R. StabiliTrak® System onpage 8‑35. Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 8‑40(If Equipped). Economy Mode(If Equipped). See FuelEconomy Mode on page 8‑29.

S. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 7‑1.

T. Glove Box on page 3‑1.



Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheelup or down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

y /z : Press they button toselect the next favorite radio stationor next CD, DVD, if equipped,or MP3 track.

Press thez button to select theprevious favorite radio station orprevious CD, DVD, if equipped,or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume, press − todecrease the volume.

b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith an OnStar®, Bluetooth,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeOnStar® System on page 4‑46,Bluetooth (Overview ) on page 6‑47or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls )on page 6‑48 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition ) on page 6‑52 orBluetooth (Navigation) onpage 6‑63, or the separatenavigation manual for moreinformation.



$ /c (End Call / Mute): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

SRCE: Press to select an audiosource.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

2: Fast wipes.

1: Slow wipes.

& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the& band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If the vehicle hasRainsense™, see followingRainsense™ information.

( (Off): Turns the wipers off.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 9‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.



Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned LOCK/OFFwhile the wipers are on 1, 2 or&, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned toLOCK/OFF while the wipers areperforming wipes due to windshieldwash, the wipers continue to rununtil they reach the base of thewindshield.

Rainsense™

For vehicles with Rainsense, asensor located near the top centerof the windshield detects theamount of water on the windshieldand automatically controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

& (Rainsense Wipe SensitivityControl): Move the windshieldwiper lever to&. Turn the bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity.

Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

To deactivate Rainsense, movethe windshield wiper lever outof& position.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever tothe OFF position. This disables theautomatic Rainsense windshieldwipes and/or rear wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Windshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.The spray continues until the leveris released. The wipers will run afew times. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

Press the upper or lower portion ofthe button to control the rear wiperand rear wiper delay.

The system turns off when thebutton is returned to the middleposition.

Z (Rear Wiper): For continuousrear window wipes.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets adelay between wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Push thewindshield wiper lever forward tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever automaticallyreturns to its original position whenreleased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift leveris in R (Reverse) and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift leveris in R (Reverse) and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in the

reservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Headlamp WasherFor vehicles with headlampwashers, they are located to theside of the headlamps.

The headlamps must be on in orderto use the headlamp washers. If theheadlamps are not on, only thewindshield will be washed.

Pull the wiper lever towards youand hold briefly to activate. Theheadlamp washers will spray once,pause, and spray again. Theheadlamp washer will spray againafter five windshield wash cycles.



See Washer Fluid on page 9‑23 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compassreceives its heading and otherinformation from Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.

See Multi-Band Antenna onpage 6‑18 for the location of thevehicle's antennas. The compasssystem is designed to operate for acertain number of miles or degreesof turn before needing a signalfrom the GPS satellites. When thecompass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 4‑34 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.

Clock (Analog Clock)The analog clock is located on theinstrument panel above the radio.The clock is not connected with anyother vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock:

1. Locate the adjustmentbuttons directly below theclock face.

2. Push and hold either adjustmentbutton to advance or reverse theclock hands. Holding the buttonsdown will cause the clock toadvance faster. Release thebuttons before reaching thedesired time.

3. Push and release the buttons toincrease the time by one minuteincrements until the desired timeis reached.

Clock (Digital Clock)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation onpage 6‑7 for information abouthow to use the menu system. Seethe separate navigation systemmanual for instructions on how tooperate the digital clock for thenavigation system.



To turn the digital clock on or off:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Clock Displayed.

4. Press MENU/SELECT to turnthe clock on or off.

Setting the Time and Date



3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the next value.

6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press the0 BACK button at any time orpress the MENU/SELECT knobafter adjusting the minutesor year.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & DayFormat



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto select MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto turn Auto Time Adjust onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cellular telephone.

The vehicle has four accessorypower outlets. The power outletslocated below the climate controlsystem inside the front storage bin,inside the center floor console, andon the rear of the center floorconsole are powered while thevehicle is in ON/RUN/START orACC/ACCESSORY mode, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.

The power outlet located in the rearcargo area is powered at all times.



There is a small cap that must beremoved to access the accessorypower outlet. When not using theoutlet be sure to cover it with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory power plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem,see your dealer for additionalinformation on the accessorypower outlets.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehicle candamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Follow the proper installationinstructions that are included withany electrical equipment you install.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not hang any typeof accessory or accessorybracket from the plug becausethe power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only.

Cigarette LighterThere may be a cigarette lighterlocated under the climate controlsystem, inside the front storage bin.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. The lighter pops out when itis ready to be used.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThere may be an ashtray locatedunder the climate control system onthe instrument panel. Press the doorto release the ashtray.

To empty the ashtray, remove it fromthe instrument panel by holding theedges and pulling straight out. Toreinstall, push the tray back intoplace.

There may also be ashtrays locatedon the center floor console behindthe shift lever and in the rear doors.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver's door to show the oldmileage reading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.



Fuel Economy Gauge

US

For vehicles equipped with thisgauge, it shows the fuel economythat the vehicle is currentlyachieving.

MIN: Is the minimum fuel economy.This least efficient fuel economyusually occurs during quickaccelerations or when idling.

MAX: Is the maximum fueleconomy. The best fuel economyusually occurs during coasting.

This gauge moves often as it is aninstantaneous calculation based oncurrent driving conditions.

Canada

The gauge shows the fuel usagethat the vehicle is currentlyachieving in liters per100 kilometers (¹/100 km).

20: Is the minimum fuel economy.This least efficient fuel economyusually occurs during quickaccelerations or when idling.

¹/100: Is the maximum fueleconomy. The best fuel economyusually occurs during coasting.

This gauge moves often as it is aninstantaneous calculation based oncurrent driving conditions.

Turbo Gauge (2.8L Only)

For vehicles with a turbo gauge, itindicates when the vehicle is usingturbo power.

When the needle is in the whitearea, left of center of the gauge,turbo is not being used.

As the accelerator peddle ispressed the needle may move tothe right of center indicating turbopower. Under normal conditions theneedle will not display a reading inthe red.

Once the driver eases off theaccelerator pedal or thetransmission shifts, the needlemoves back to the left of centerof the gauge.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

United States Canada

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

If the indicator needle moves intothe shaded area, the engine is toohot. A temperature indicator light willturn on.

If the vehicle has been operatingunder normal driving conditions, andthe temperature indicator lightcomes on, pull off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand a chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to reminddrivers to fasten their safety belts.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecome on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt

Second Row Passenger BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started and theTrip/Fuel display is chosen, threegray seatbelt symbols come on andstay on for several seconds on thetop of the Driver information Center(DIC) to remind passengers tofasten their safety belts.

If the Vehicle Information display isselected, a full page screen displaysat start-up that has the threeseatbelt symbols.

Once the passenger seatbelt isbuckled, the corresponding seat beltsymbol in the DIC turns green.There are no seat position sensorsin the seat. If a seatbelt is notinitially buckled, the clustercontinues to show the grayseatbelt icon.

While the vehicle is moving, if asecond row passenger that waspreviously buckled becomesunbuckled, a full screen warningdisplays with the corresponding seatbelt indicator flashing red. A chimemay sound.

Acknowledge warning messages bypressing any of the DIC switches.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring, and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 2‑28.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 2‑36 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to startthe vehicle from a distance youmay not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontal andseat‐mounted side impact airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat‐mounted sideimpact airbag.



If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4‑18 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 4‑33.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.



This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made tothe engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failure topass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.



Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected.. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 8‑50. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Gasoline Specifications onpage 8‑47.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:. The vehicle will not pass this

inspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the ignition isplaced in ON/RUN and the lightis not on.



. The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 9‑105.



Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

For vehicles with the Electric ParkBrake (EPB), this light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

The park brake status light comeson when the brake is applied. If thelight continues flashing after thepark brake is released, or whiledriving, there is a problem with theElectric Parking Brake system.A SERVICE PARKING BRAKEmessage may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 4‑34 for more information.

If the light does not comeon, or remains flashing, seeyour dealer.

For vehicles with the Electric ParkBrake (EPB), the brake warninglight should come on briefly when asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If this light comes on there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 8‑31 for moreinformation.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on afterdriving at a speed of at least20 km/h (13 mph), or comes onagain while driving, see your dealerretailer for service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.



If both ABS and brake warninglights are on, the vehicle's antilockbrakes are not functioning and thereis a problem with the regular brakes.See your dealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Lighton page 4‑23.

See Brake System Messages onpage 4‑34 for all brake related DICmessages.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the traction control button.

This light along with the StabiliTrakOFF light come on when StabiliTrakis turned off.

If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off wheelspin is not limited. Adjustdriving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 8‑34 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 8‑35 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off bypressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited.

When the StabiliTrak system is off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Adjustdriving accordingly.

Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystem and the warning lightturns off.



Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly while starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light will then go off.



The indicator/warning light flasheswhile the StabiliTrak or TCS systemis working to control the vehicle ona low traction surface.

If the TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightcomes on and stays on whiledriving, try to reset the system. Stopand turn off the engine for at least15 seconds. Then start the engineagain. If this light still comes on andstays on, the vehicle needs service.

The vehicle is safe to drive, butStabiliTrak is not active, adjustdriving accordingly.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System, this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitor System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 4‑40 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label. SeeTire Pressure on page 9‑59 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9‑62 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.



Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) switch, located nextto the shifter, is pressed. Press theswitch again to turn off the light andexit the fuel saver mode. SeeDriving for Better Fuel Economy onpage 8‑2 for more information.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is located near the fuelgauge and comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on as a checkto show it is working.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 1‑17.

High-Beam on Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 5‑2 for moreinformation.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) Light

This light comes on solid whenthere is a problem with the AdaptiveForward Lighting system andflashes when the system isswitching between lighting modes.See Adaptive Forward Lighting(AFL) on page 5‑3 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See Front FogLamps on page 5‑6 for moreinformation.



Lamps on Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 8‑37 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). The DICdisplays information about yourvehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 4‑33 for more information. Allmessages appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41 formore information.



DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons located on the turnsignal lever located on the left sideof the steering wheel. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, vehicle systeminformation, and warning messagesif a system problem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows what position the shift leveris in and the odometer. Thedirection the vehicle is driving willbe shown on the top of the display.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

wx (Thumbwheel): Use thethumbwheel to scroll through theitems in each menu. A small markerwill move up or down the side of thedisplay as you scroll through theitems. This shows where each itemis in the menu.

SET (Set/Clear): Use this button toset or clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button on the turnsignal lever until Trip/FuelInformation Menu is displayed. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Trip. Average Fuel Economy or

Average Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

. Fuel Range

. Fuel Used

. Average Vehicle Speed

. Elapsed Time

. Navigation Turn by Turn

. Speed and Curve Assist

. Digital Speedometer

. Blank

Trip

The Trip display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) , sincethe trip odometer was last reset.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the trip reset stemor the SET button while the tripodometer display is showing.

Average Fuel Economy orAverage Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy

The Average Fuel Economydisplay shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.



The Average Fuel Economy can bereset by pressing SET while theAverage Fuel Economy display isshowing.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averageeconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Fuel Range

The Fuel Range display shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. Fuel range cannot bereset.

Fuel Used

The Fuel Used display shows theapproximate gallons (gal) or liters(L) of fuel that has been used sincelast reset. The fuel used can bereset by pressing the SET buttonwhile the Fuel Used display isshowing.

Average Vehicle Speed

The Average Vehicle Speed displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in miles per hour (mph) orkilometers per hour (km/h). Thisaverage is calculated based on thevarious vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value.The average speed can be reset bypressing the SET button while theAverage Vehicle Speed display isshowing.

Elapsed Time

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET whileElapsed Time is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, pressSET briefly while Elapsed Time isdisplayed. To reset the timer to zero,press and hold SET.

Turn by Turn

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar® System onpage 4‑46 or the Navigationmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Speed and Curve Assist

This display will show the speedlimit or the advised speed asdetermined by the information onthe map disc in the navigationsystem. If there is no map disc inthe navigation system, this displaywill not be available.



Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in either milesper hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). The speedometercannot be reset.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button on the turnsignal lever until Vehicle InformationMenu is displayed. Use thethumbwheel to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Battery Voltage. Blank

Unit

Move the thumbwheel up or down toswitch between US or Metric whenthe Unit display is active. Press SETto confirm the setting. This willchange the displays on the clusterand DIC to either English (US) ormetric measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either pounds per squareinch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 9‑61 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 9‑62 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If Remaining Oil Life 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 4‑36. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 9‑10. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2 formore information.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system press the SETbutton while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 9‑12.



Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 4‑20 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 4‑33.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Compass onpage 4‑10.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 9‑27 for more information.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 9‑25.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message is displayed when thebrakes are becoming overheated.You may see this when driving onhills. Shift to a lower gear.

STEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 8‑31 for more information.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is on while thevehicle is in motion. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 8‑31 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the parkingbrake. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 4‑10.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake and then try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message will display when thecruise control is set and it will showthe speed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 8‑37 for moreinformation.



Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a Door Openmessage will also be displayed.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

POWER LIFTGATEUNAVAILABLE

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turnsback on. You can continue todrive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOWADD COOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low; see Engine Coolanton page 9‑17.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — STOPENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot; see EngineOverheating on page 9‑20.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 9‑12 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑29 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2 formore information.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10.

OIL PRESSURELOW — STOP ENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven.

The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but maximum accelerationand speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.



Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if the keylessaccess system does not detect aRKE transmitter. The transmitterbattery may be weak. See “Startingthe Vehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 1‑3 .

NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKETO RESTART

This message is displayed if theremote is no longer detected in thevehicle. Press the brake pedal torestart the vehicle.

NUMBER OF KEYSPROGRAMMED

This message displays whenprogramming new keys to thevehicle.

REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE

This message displays whenleaving the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter still inside.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the RKE transmitterneeds to be replaced.

Lamp Messages

AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARDLIGHTING) LAMPS NEEDSERVICE

This message displays when theAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)system is disabled and needsservice. See your dealer. SeeAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) onpage 5‑3 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 5‑3.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned off. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 5‑3.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See your dealer to have the frontturn signal bulbs replaced. See TurnSignal Lamps on page 9‑40 andReplacement Bulbs on page 9‑43for more information on the rear turnsignal bulb replacement.



TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message is displayed when thepark assist system has been turnedoff. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 8‑40.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the park assistsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE REAR AXLE

This message displays when thereis a problem with the All-WheelDrive (AWD) System. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the selective ridecontrol. See Selective Ride Controlon page 8‑37.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). If thismessage appears, try to reset thesystem. Stop, turn off the engine forat least 15 seconds, and then try tostart the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.



Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Safety Belt Messages

BUCKLE SEATBELT

This message displays as areminder when the safety belt is notbuckled.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

PRESS BRAKE TO STARTVEHICLE

This message is displayed whenattempting to start the vehiclewithout first pressing the brakepedal.

SERVICE KEYLESS STARTSYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the keyless startsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.



Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 9‑62 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 9‑62 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle tires is low.

This message also displays “LeftFront”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”,or “Right Rear” to indicate thelocation of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 4‑26.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 9‑52, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11, and Tire Pressure onpage 9‑59.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 4‑29.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSIONHOT — IDLE ENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 4‑7 .

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOWADD FLUID

This message will be displayedwhen the washer fluid level is low.For information on filling the washerfluid, see Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls areused to access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures. Not all features areavailable on every vehicle. Only thefeatures available on a particularvehicle will be displayed on thatvehicle.

CONFIG (Configuration): Pressto access the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU / SELECT Knob: Pressthe center of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items.Turn the knob to scroll throughthe menus.

0 BACK: Press to exit or movebackwards in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knobto highlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of theMENU / SELECT knob to selectthe Vehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Locking, Unlocking,

Starting. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU / SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Remote Start Auto Seat Cool. Remote Start Auto Heated Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Auto Fan Speed is highlightedto open the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Air Quality Sensor

This will allow you to select whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Air Quality Sensor ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight High or LowSensitivity. Press the knob toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Remote Start Auto Seat Cool

When on, this feature will turn thevented seats on when using remotestart on warm days.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Auto Seat Coolis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect On or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heated Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Remote Start Auto HeatedSeats is highlighted. Turn the knobto select On or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Auto Defog

This will allow you to turn the autodefog on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Auto Defog is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press the knobto confirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.



Auto Rear Defog

This will allow you to turn the autorear defog on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Auto Rear Defog ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight On orOff. Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This allows you to turn the easy exitdriver seat feature on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Easy Exit Driver Seat ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Chime Volume is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Normal orHigh. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

This allows you to turn the reversetilt mirror feature on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECTknob when Reverse Tilt Mirror ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectDriver & Passenger or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on, the rear window wiper willturn on automatically when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU / SELECT knob toselect the language. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.



Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable and the door will lock asprogrammed through this menu.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU / SELECTknob when Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Pressing either the power lockbutton or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press the MENU / SELECTknob when Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.



Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Unlock Feedback (Lights). Locking Feedback. Door Unlock Options. Passive Door Lock. Passive Door Unlock. Memory Remote Recall

Unlock Feedback (Lights)

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Unlock Feedback (Lights) ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectFlash Lights or Off. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Locking Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Locking Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Door Unlock Options

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECTknob when Door Unlock Optionsis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect All Doors or Driver Door Only.When set to Driver Door Only, thedriver door will unlock the first timethe unlock button is pressed andall doors will unlock when thebutton is pressed a second time.

When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the first press ofthe unlock button. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Passive Door Lock

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, when enabled, thisfeature allows the doors to lock afterseveral seconds if all doors areclosed and at least one keylessaccess transmitter has beenremoved from the interior of thevehicle. It does not matter how faraway that the transmitter is from thevehicle. This feature can also beconfigured to chirp the horn whenthe doors are passively locked.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Passive Door Lockis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect On With Chirp, On, or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.



Passive Door Unlock

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select which doors willautomatically unlock when you openthe driver’s door with the keylessaccess transmitter present.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Passive Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors or Driver Door. Press theknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen Memory Remote Recall ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select Yesor No. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.



How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn‐by‐turnnavigation.

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation and Hands‐FreeCalling are available on mostvehicles. Not all OnStar servicesare available on all vehicles.

For more information see theOnStar Owner's Guide or visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations,see the OnStar Owner's Guide inthe glove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for that

area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at alltimes.

The OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar call center whenQ is

pressed,] is pressed, or if theairbags or ACR system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicle's GPS location and, inthe event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.



Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate. Thereare other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar hands-free calling. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 4‑6 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly.PressQ and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.



Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If the vehicle has this feature, youwill see these buttons with oneLED indicator next to them in theheadliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale ofthe vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.



To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver(motor-head unit).

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and oneof the three Universal HomeRemote buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Do notrelease the Universal HomeRemote button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslow to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button (selectedbutton from Step 2) whileobserving the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal HomeRemote button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4 through 6.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicator lightblinks rapidly fortwo seconds, then turnsto a constant light and thegarage door does notmove, continue with theprogramming Steps 4through 6.

It may be helpful to haveanother person to assistwith the remaining Steps 4through 6.



“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons

4. After Steps 1 through 3 havebeen completed, locate the“Learn” or “Smart” button insidethe garage on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). The name and colorof the button may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.

6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalHome Remote button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, and thenrelease.

The Universal Home Remote shouldnow activate the garage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem”.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1‐800‐355‐3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.



If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming agate operator or garage dooropener by using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

2. Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. TheUniversal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Universal RemoteSystem Operation

Using Universal Home Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on whilethe signal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons:

1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Home Remote button.Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 of the section“Programming Universal HomeRemote”.

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1‐800‐355‐3515 or go towww.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices on page 12‑3.


Lighting 5-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights


5-2 Lighting

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps listed below.A warning chime sounds if thedriver's door is opened when theignition switch is off and theheadlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, pressto turn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps onpage 5‑6 .

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash‐to‐pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you, then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow‐beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness or for vehicleswith High Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the DRL lights will comeon when the following conditionsare met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.


Lighting 5-3

When the DRL are on, only thelow‐beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thehigh‐beam headlamps, taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel andother lamps will not be on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL lamps off or onagain, turn the exterior lampscontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the DRL lamps cannot beturned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamps control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 5‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered,or the headlamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)For vehicles with Xenon headlamps,the Adaptive Forward LightingSystem (AFL) adjusts theheadlamps to provide greaterroad illumination in variousdriving conditions.

To enable AFL, set the exterior lampcontrol to the AUTO position.Moving the control out of the AUTOposition will deactivate the system.AFL will operate when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL will not operate whenthe transmission is in R (Reverse).AFL is not immediately operableafter starting the vehicle; driving ashort distance is required tocalibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 5‑1.


5-4 Lighting

Curve Lighting

The Xenon light beam pivots basedon the steering wheel position andvehicle speed of at least 10 km/h(6 mph). The headlamps shine at anangle of up to 15 degrees to theright or left of the direction of travel.

Motorway Lighting

If the vehicle is traveling straightcontinuously at high speeds, thelight beam automatically raisesslightly to increase the headlamprange.

City Lighting

If the vehicle speed is less than50 km/h (31 mph), the headlamprange is automatically reduced.

Twilight SentinelThis feature automatically turns thelamps on and off. A light sensor ontop of the instrument panel makesthe Twilight Sentinel® work, so besure it is not covered.

With Twilight Sentinel® the followingwill happen:. When it is dark enough outside,

the Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) go off, and the headlampsand parking lamps come on. Theother lamps that come on withthe headlamps also come on.

. When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off, and theDRL come on, as long as theexterior lamp switch is in theAUTO position.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is aslight delay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to the

DRL. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 5‑6 for moreinformation.

The vehicle can be idled with thelamps off, even when it is darkoutside. After starting the vehicle,turn the exterior lamp control to off,then release it. The lamps willremain off until the control is turnedto off again.

Twilight Sentinel® also providesexterior illumination as you leavethe vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® hasturned on the lamps when theignition is turned off, the lampsremain on until:. The exterior lamp control is

moved from O to the parkinglamp position, or

. the delay time selected haselapsed.


Lighting 5-5

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41 to select the delay time.You can also select no delay time.

If the ignition is turned off with theexterior lamp control in the parkinglamp or headlamp position, theTwilight Sentinel® delay will notoccur. The lamps will turn off assoon as the control is turned off.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel near the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned-out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 9‑44 for more information.


5-6 Lighting

Front Fog LampsFor vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is located on the exteriorlamp control, on the outboard sideof the steering wheel.

The ignition and the low‐beamheadlamps must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# : Press to turn the fog lampson or off. An indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onwhen the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high‐beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high‐beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights. Thethumbwheel is located next to theexterior lamp control.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the thumbwheelup or down to brighten or dim theinstrument panel lights.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamp is located over therear compartment and is controlledby the dome lamp. See DomeLamps on page 5‑6.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is inthe door position.

Dome LampsTo change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamp off, even when a dooris open.

1 (Door): The lamp comes onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps located onthe overhead console and over therear passenger doors. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

For the overhead console readinglamps, press the button next toeach lamp.

For the rear passenger readinglamps, press the lamp lens.


Infotainment System 6-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2Overview (Radio with CD ) . . . . 6-3Overview (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM ) . . . . . . . . 6-5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Audio PlayersCD Player(Radio with CD ) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Mass StorageMedia (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD ) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

PhoneBluetooth (Overview ) . . . . . . . . 6-47Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-63

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.


6-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 8‑3.

This vehicle's infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers aremodified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 8‑20 for moreinformation.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate NavigationSystem Manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.



Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

C. TUNE. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.. CD: Selects tracks.

D. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

E. g SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.



F. l SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

G. Z CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

H. CD. Selects the CD player

when listening to adifferent audio source.

I. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

J. k. CD: Pauses the CD.

K. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

L. MENU/SELECT. Press: Selects menu items.. Turn: Opens menus,

highlights menu items,or sets numeric valueswhile in a menu.

M. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

N. CONFIG. Open the settings menu.

O. PHONE. Opens the phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

P. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

Q. AUX. Selects a connected

external audio source.

R. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.



Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.. MEM: Saves and selects

favorite tracks andplaylists.

C. TUNE/INFO. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations and showsavailable information aboutthe current station.

. CD: Selects tracks andshows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

. MEM: Selects tracks andshows availableinformation about thecurrent track.



D. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.. MEM: Opens the

favorites list.

E. g SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD/DVD: Selects theprevious track or rewindswithin a track.

. MEM: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

F. l SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD/DVD: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwardswithin a track.

. MEM: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwardswithin a track.

G. Z CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

H. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

I. MEM/DVD/AUX. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,

USB, or a connectedauxillary audio or auxillaryaudio/video source.

J. k. Radio: Pauses time shifted

content.. CD/DVD: Pauses

CD/DVD‐A and DVD‐Vplayback. Stops DVD‐Vplayback.

. MEM: Pauses MEMplayback.

K. CD/DVD Slot. Insert a disc.

L. MENU/SELECT. Press: Selects menu items.. Turn: Open menus,

highlights menu items,or sets numeric valueswhile in a menu.

M. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

N. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

O. CONFIG. Open the settings menu.



P. DEL. MEM: Delete the current

track from MEM.

Q. O REC

. CD/DVD: Records contentfrom audio CDs andMP3/WMA CDs.

. AUX: Records contentfrom USB mass storagedevices.

R. PHONE. Opens the phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus that areshown on the display, and steeringwheel controls, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after ten minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

PHONE: For vehicles withOnStar®, press and hold PHONE tomute the infotainment system. Pressand hold PHONE again, or turn theVOL/O knob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar®, pressPHONE to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press PHONE again,or turn the VOL/O knob tocancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/SELECT knob andthe 0 BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU/SELECT: Press to:. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Enter the menu system.. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.



0 BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/SELECTbutton to select the highlightedoption.

Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SELECTbutton to activate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SELECTbutton to confirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SELECTbutton to turn the function onor off.



Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SELECTbutton to select the character.

Press the 0 BACK button to deletethe last character in the sequenceor press and hold to delete theentire character sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold theMENU/SELECT buttonuntil the value changes to 0.

Press the 0 BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.




DSP (Digital Signal Processing)Settings

For vehicles with DSP, it is used toprovide a choice of differentlistening experiences.. 2.0 Normal ‐ Select this setting

to adjust the audio for normalmode. This provides the bestsound quality for all seatingpositions.

. Centerpoint ‐ Centerpoint®

signal processing circuitry. Thissetting creates a surround soundlistening experience from stereoCDs and satellite radio.

For more information onBose® Centerpoint® signalprocessing circuitry, please visitwww. bose.com/centerpoint.

. 5.1 Surround ‐ The infotainmentsystem used in conjunction withthe Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®

sound system for the vehicleincludes digital 5.1 decoding.This technology unlocks the fullbenefit of digital 5.1 recordings,so digitally encoded music andmovie soundtracks can bepresented faithfully andaccurately. If the video screensor Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is on,5.1 Surround is not available.

To adjust the DSP settings:


2. Select DSP.



System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:


2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the 0 BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.


5. Press the 0 BACK buttonto go back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.


5. Press the 0 BACK buttonto go back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

MENU/SELECT: Press and turn tonavigate the available menus.

TUNE: Turn to search for stations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

l SEEK/g SEEK: Press tosearch for stations.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

k (Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.



RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toopen the main radio menu for thatfrequency.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND buttonto choose AM, FM, or XM™,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg SEEK orl SEEK.To automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK until the station on thedisplay is reached, then release thebutton.

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM)

Briefly pressg SEEK orl SEEK,to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE knob to select thefrequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.



Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programing types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received.


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored inthe station list are no longerreceived. A station search willbe completed and the firststation in the updated listwill play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SELECT knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.



Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofFM/AM content. While listening tothe radio, the content from thecurrent station is always beingbuffered.

Press thek button to pause theradio. The radio displays the timeshift status bar. The status barshows the amount of content that isstored in the buffer and the currentpause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, pressthek button again. The radiois no longer live, but played fromthe time shift buffer. A status bardisplays below the station number.

Press and hold theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to fast forward orrewind through the time shift buffer.

Holdl SEEK until the end of therecorded buffer resumes liveplayback.

Press and release theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to jump forward orback 30 seconds in the time shiftbuffer.

When the radio station is changed,the buffer is cleared andautomatically restarted for thecurrent station. Content from apreviously tuned station is nolonger available.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording or withother sources of playback.

Pausing AM/FM with the VehicleTurned Off

If AM/FM is paused when thevehicle is turned off, the radiocontinues to buffer the current radiostation for up to 20 minutes. If thevehicle is turned back on within20 minutes, the radio resumesplayback from the paused point.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio hasa wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is requiredto receive the XM service. Formore information, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

g SEEK /l SEEK: Press to goto the previous or next channel.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1‐6: Press to select a favorite.

TUNE: Turn to select channel.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

k (Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.

Selecting the XM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM andXM bands. The last channel playedin that band begins to play whenthat band is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using theg SEEK orl SEEKbuttons, or the TUNE knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the MENU/SELECT knobto remove or add the category.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusingg SEEK,l SEEK, theTUNE knob, or the menu system.

Selecting a Channel Using

g SEEK orl SEEK(Radio with CD)

. Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previousor next channel.

. Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK to scroll through theprevious or next channel untilthe channel is reached.

Selecting a Channel Using

g SEEK orl SEEK (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previous ornext channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE Knob

To select an XM channel using theTUNE knob:

Turn the TUNE knob to highlight anXM channel, the channel is selectedafter a short delay.



To select a channel using the menu:

1. Turn the menu knob and selectChannel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System

1. Turn the menu knob.

2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button untilthe channel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofXM content. While listening to theradio, the content from the currentchannel is always being buffered.

Press thek button to pause theradio. The radio displays the timeshift status bar. The status barshows the amount of content that isstored in the buffer and the currentpause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, press thek button again. The radio is nolonger live, but played from the timeshift buffer. A status bar displaysbelow the channel number.

Press and hold theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to fast forward orrewind through the time shift buffer.Holdl SEEK until the end of therecorded buffer resumes liveplayback.

Press and release theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous song in the time shiftbuffer.

When the channel is changed, thebuffer is cleared and automaticallyrestarted for the current channel.Content from a previously tunedstation is no longer available.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording or withother sources of playback.



Pausing XM with the VehicleTurned Off

If XM is paused when the vehicle isturned off, the radio continues tobuffer the current radio station forup to 20 minutes. If the vehicle isturned back on within 20 minutes,the radio resumes playback from thepaused point.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data, no action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location that where the XMsignal is being blocked. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. Theantenna is used for the AM/FMradio, OnStar, the XM SatelliteRadio Service System, and GPS(Global Positioning System); if thevehicle has these features. Keepthe antenna clear of obstructionsfor clear reception. If the vehiclehas a sunroof and it is open, theperformance of the AM/FM radio,OnStar, XM system, and GPS canbe affected.



Audio Players

CD Player(Radio with CD)The CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD player are:

CD: Press to use the CD player.

l SEEK/g SEEK : Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

TUNE: Turn to select tracks.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter themenu, press to select an item.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

k : Press to pause a CD or MP3track, press again to resumeplayback.



Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

Press theZ button.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD button, if there is adisc in the player, it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press theg SEEK orl SEEKbutton to select the previous ornext track.

. Turn the TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl SEEK org SEEK to fast forward or rewindwithin the current track.

Selecting an MP3 Track




Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists / Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.



Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


CD/DVD PlayerThe CD/DVD player can playCDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.

The CD/DVD player will not play8 cm (3 in) discs.

Care of CDs and DVDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center tothe outer edge.

Care of the CD/DVD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD/DVDplayer. If a label is needed, label thetop of the recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD/DVD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD/DVD player are:



MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choosebetween the MEM, CD/DVD,and AUX.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the disc that maybe available.

TUNE: Turn to select tracks.

MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter themenu and press to select an item.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,or DVD‐V, press again to resumeplayback. Press and hold to stop aDVD‐V disc.

Inserting a CD or DVD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the slot until it isdrawn in.

Removing a CD or DVD

Press theZ button.

The disc is pushed out of theCD/DVD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc

Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button ifthere is a disc in the player, itbegins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks




Using the menu:


2. Select Tracks List.


Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track

Press thek button to pause a CD

or DVD‐A track. Press thek buttonagain to continue playing the track.

Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks inRandom Order


Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl SEEK org SEEK to fast forward or rewindwithin the current track.



Playing an MP3 CD or DVD

Files that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (disc).

The search rate increases ifthe MENU/SELECT knob iscontinuously turned while searchingin a list.

Selecting an MP3 Track


. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.


Using the CD or DVD Menu:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for MP3s ona CD or DVD

It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc. The infotainmentsystem automatically switches toFM while the disc is being read.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres

The number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.

4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Playing MP3 Tracks in RandomOrder


Recording an Audioor MP3 CD to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 6‑25 for more information.



Playing a DVD‐V

See Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 6‑36 forinformation about how to control aVideo DVD using the wirelessremote control.

Selecting a Chapter


. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or nextchapter.


Using DVD Menu:


2. Select Chapter List.

3. Select the chapter.

Selecting a Title


2. Select Title List.

3. Select the title.

Changing the Audio Stream


2. Select Audio Stream.

3. Select Change Audio Stream.

4. Press MENU/SELECT to changethe selection.

Select Cancel to exit the menu.

Pausing a DVD


2. Select Pause, to pause the disc.Select unpause to startplayback.

Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu

Use the following actions tonavigate the title menu on aDVD‐V Disc.. Select / Enter. Cursor UP. Cursor DOWN

. Cursor RIGHT

. Cursor LEFT

. Up Menu

Use the following actions tonavigate the menu on a DVD‐V Discwhile playing chapters.. Pause (Play). Chapter List. Title List. DVD/DVD — DVD on both

video screens. DVD/AUX — Left video

screen / Right AUX input. AUX/DVD — Left AUX

input / Right video screen. AUX/AUX — AUX input on

both video screens

To navigate the menu:


2. Select the action.



Mass StorageMedia (MEM)Infotainment systems with MEMstorage are able to record up to1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music fromAudio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,and USB storage devices. The MEMplayer can also time shift audio fromAM, FM, and XM™ radio.

Music or content that is stored inMEM that you did not create,or have the right to distribute, mustbe deleted before the sale or end ofthe lease of the vehicle.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theMEM player are:

MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to selectthe MEM player.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the MEM trackthat may be available. Turn to selecttracks.

k : Press to pause the trackcurrently playing, press again toresume playback.

O REC: Press to record musicfrom a CD or USB drive.

DEL: Press to delete the currenttrack from MEM.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displayMEM favorites.

1 to 6: Press to select a track orplaylist stored in that numericposition.

Recording From Audio CDs

The infotainment system can recordthe current song playing or all songsfrom an audio CD to MEM. A statusbar appears on the top of thedisplay when the recording processstarts and disappears when theprocess has ended. Copy protectedCDs cannot be recorded to MEM.

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select “RecordCurrent Song” or “Record All Songson Disc”. If the track has startedplaying, the system will restart thetrack and begin recording from thebeginning of the track. When thesong recording is completed, themessage “Song Recorded to MEM”displays, and there may be a slightpause.

Songs recorded to MEM are storedas the current date, disc and tracknumber.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM, the message“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”displays.



Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an audio CD todisplay the stop recording option.Select “Stop Recording Songto MEM”.

Renaming Recorded Discs

Discs that have been recorded toMEM can be renamed.


2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.

3. Select the disc.

4. Select Album or Artist to renameeither one.

5. Use the menu knob to enter thecharacter sequence. SeeOperation on page 6‑7 formore information.

Recording From MP3/WMADiscs or USB Storage Devices

USB Host Support

The USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select “RecordCurrent Song” or “ Record All Songson Disc”.

The information stored by MEM istitled according to the ID3 tagassociated with it.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM the message“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”displays.

Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an MP3/WMA CD orUSB storage device to display thestop recording option. Select “StopRecording Song to MEM”

Deleting Tracks From MEM

Individual tracks and all tracks canbe deleted from MEM.

To delete individual tracks, pressand release the DEL button whilethe track is playing.

To delete all tracks from MEM,press and hold the DEL button whilea track is playing.



Playing From MEM

Playing Back a PreviouslyRecorded CD

Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack if MEM is already playing fromthe previously recorded disc.

1. Select Recorded Disc List.

2. Select the disc.


Searching For a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.


4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the MENU/SELECTknob is continuously turnedwhile searching in a list.

Shuffle Songs

Select the Shuffle Songs optionfrom the MEM menu to randomlyplay back tracks stored in MEM.

Configuring MEM Favorites

During MEM playback, press theFAV button to change betweenfavorite categories. The favoritecategories are:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres

To remove MEM favoritescategories:



3. Select MEM Favorites.

4. Remove the check mark fromthe box to remove that MEMfavorites category.

Replace the check mark to re-addthe removed category.



Saving MEM Tracks asFavorites

Favorites can be saved bypressing and holding one of the1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can bestored according to the following list:

Playlist: Adds currently playingtrack to the playlist selected.

Artist: Saves the artist associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.

Album: Saves the albumassociated with the currently playingtrack in the indicated favoritesposition.

Genre: Saves the genre associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.

Creating Playlists

To create a playlist using tracksstored in MEM:

1. Select Playlist from the MEMfavorites.

2. Select the track to be stored inthe playlist.

3. Press and hold one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons until thetrack can be heard again tostore the track.

4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to storeadditional tracks in the playlist.

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD )The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack, the USB port orBluetooth® wireless technology,if equipped.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 6‑7.

The AUX input is located in thecenter console.



3.5mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack touse a portable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD). USB Drives. Zunes

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPod's can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off, then press the 0 BACKbutton to return the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off, then pressthe 0 BACK button to return themain screen.



On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.




Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Repeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting a Bluetooth®

Device

Before a Bluetooth device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem, it must first be paired to thesystem. Not all Bluetooth devicescan be paired to the infotainmentsystem. Before pairing the Bluetoothdevice, become familiar with its userguide for Bluetooth functions. Thesystem only connects to Bluetoothdevices that support A2DP(Advanced Audio DistributionProfile) version 1.2.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability can not be paired to thevehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.



Pairing Information:. Up to five devices can be paired

to the system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. The infotainment system

automatically links with the firstavailable paired device in theorder the device was paired.

. Only one paired device can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the device isdeleted.

Bluetooth Setup Menu

The Bluetooth Setup menu can beaccessed with or without a deviceattached to the USB port.

To select the Bluetooth Setup menuwhen a device is attached to theUSB port and active:

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knobwhile in the iPod, Zune, PFD,or USB device main menu.

2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.

To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a device is not attachedto the USB port, or when a device isattached to the USB port but notactive:

1. Press the AUX button until AUXis the active source.



To select the Bluetooth Music Setupmenu when a Bluetooth device isconnected and active:



Pairing a Device

1. Select Connect To New Devicefrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. The system asks a series ofYes/No questions to determinewhat type of device is beingpaired.

3. After the system determineswhat type of Bluetooth device isbeing paired, the Bluetoothdevice will need to be put intodiscovery mode.



4. Some devices may require aPIN number in order to completethe pairing process. Locate thedevice named “GMusicConnect”in the list on the Bluetoothdevice and follow theinstructions on the device toenter the four digit PIN numberprovided by the infotainmentsystem.

Connecting to a Device

Once a device is paired to theinfotainment system, it can beconnected to the infotainmentsystem.

To connect a paired device when noother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

To connect a paired device whenanother device is connected to theinfotainment system:

1. Select the Select Device optionfrom the Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select the new device.

3. The active device isdisconnected from the systemand the new device isconnected.

Removing a Device

1. Select Remove Device from theBluetooth Music Setup menu.

2. Select the device.

3. The device is removed from thesystem.

Before connecting to the removeddevice again, it will need to pairedto the infotainment system.

Changing the Default PIN

To change the default PIN:

1. Select Change Default PIN fromthe Bluetooth MusicSetup menu.

2. Select one of the pre‐definedPIN numbers, or select Other tocreate a PIN.

To create a PIN:

1. Select the length of the PINnumber.

2. Enter the character sequence.

Messages

The following messages mayappear on the infotainment screen.

Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:This message displays when theBluetooth signal strength is low.

This Feature is Unavailable WhileVehicle is Moving: This messagedisplays when an action is notallowed while the vehicle is moving.



Controlling a Bluetooth®

Device

Bluetooth devices that supportAVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) version 1.0 may beable to be controlled by theinfotainment system.

Press and releaseg SEEK /l SEEK toskip tracks.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for FCC information.

Auxiliary Devices (Radiowith CD/DVD and MEM)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to be connectedusing the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackor the USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 6‑7.

The AUX input is located in thecenter console.

3.5mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack touse a portable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

The following devices may beconnected to the USB port andcontrolled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. USB Mass Storage Devices

Not all iPods or USB Mass StorageDevices are compatible with theinfotainment system.



Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPod's can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Selecting a Track



. Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack in the current sub menu.The track will start to play.


Turn the MENU/SELECT knob andset Shuffle Songs to On or Off.

Shuffle On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.

Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Composers. Audiobooks




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,Composers, or Audiobooks.


Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

Files that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (USB).

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.

Disconnecting a USB Drive

A USB drive should be ejected fromthe USB port before disconnectingit. To eject a USB drive:


2. Select USB Eject.





Selecting a Track



. Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack in the current sub menu.The track will start to play.

Selecting a track in a differentfolder:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for Tracks

It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.


Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.



Recording Tracks to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 6‑25 for more information.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's infotainment system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, two rear seatvideo display screens, audio/videojacks, two wireless headphones,and a remote control. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 6‑21 or theseparate navigation system manualfor more information on the vehicle'sDVD system.

Before Driving

The RSE is for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving.



In severe or extreme weatherconditions the RSE system may notwork until the temperature is withinthe operating range. The operatingrange is above −20°C (−4°F) andbelow 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature is outside of thisrange, heat or cool the vehicleuntil it is within the operating range.

Global Off

Depending on the infotainmentsystem, the RSE system may havea Global Off feature. The GlobalOff feature disables all RSE systemfeatures. Press and hold theradio power button for more thanthree seconds for Global Off todisable the RSE features.

A padlock icon may display on theinfotainment screen when theGlobal Off feature is on. On someinfotainment systems, the Global Offfeature can be turned off byperforming one of the following:. Press and hold the radio power

button for more thanthree seconds.

. Insert or eject any disc.

. Insert a DVD video disc.

. Press the Remote Control powerbutton.

. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonor thek button when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Press the SRC button on thesteering wheel when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Cycle the ignition.

Headphones

RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones. Channel 1is dedicated to the DVD player,and Channel 2 is dedicated toRSA selections. The headphonesare used to listen to variousmulti‐media. If the vehicle isnot equipped with RSA, thenchannel 2 is dedicated to anyexternal auxiliary device connectedto the rear A/V jacks. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Turn the headphones offwhen not in use.

Push the On/Off button to turn onthe headphones. A light on theheadphones comes on. If the lightdoes not come on, check thebatteries. Intermittent sound or staticcan also indicate weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.



Infrared transmitters are on the topof the left seatback video screen.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the signal or have static.

The headphones may automaticallyturn off after four hours ofcontinuous use.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol.

For best audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly,with the headband over the top ofthe head. L (Left) and R (Right)are above the ear pads and areindicators as to how theheadphones should be placedon the head.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads become wornor damaged, they can be replacedseparately from the headphones.See your dealer for moreinformation.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries:

1. Loosen the screw to the batterydoor located on the left side ofthe headphones.

2. Slide the battery door open.

3. Replace the two AAA batteries.

4. Replace the battery door andtighten the screw.

Remove the batteries if theheadphones are not going to beused for a long period of time.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks may be located onthe rear of the floor console. Theyallow audio or video cables to beconnected from an auxiliary devicesuch as a camcorder or a videogame system.

The A/V jacks are color coded:. Yellow for video input.. White for left audio input.. Red for right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system:

1. Connect the auxiliary devicecables to the A/V jacks.

2. Power on both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE videoscreen.



Changing the Source on the VideoDisplay Screens

The image from the auxiliary devicecan be switched between the videodisplay screens.

To change the display:

1. Press the AUX button on theremote control to change thesource of both video screensfrom the DVD player to theauxiliary device.

2. Press the AUX button a secondtime to change the left videoscreen source to the DVD playerand the right video screen to theauxiliary device.

3. Press the AUX button a thirdtime to change the left videoscreen source to the auxiliarydevice and the right videoscreen to the DVD player.

4. Press the AUX button a fourthtime to change the source ofboth video screens to the DVDplayer.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode,brightness, and language can bechanged from the setup menu usingthe remote control. To change asetting:

1. Pressz.

2. Usen,q, p,o andr select the settings.

3. Pressz again to exit thesetup menu.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following:. Wireless Headphones. Vehicle Speakers. Vehicle wired headphone jacks

on the rear seat audio system,if the vehicle has this feature.

The RSE system transmits theaudio signal to the wirelessheadphones if an audio signal isavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

Audio can be heard from the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem by selecting the desiredsource from the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from theA/V jacks through the vehiclespeakers by selecting Rear A/Vas the source on the radio.



Video Screens

The video screens are located inthe back of the driver and frontpassenger seats.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the seatback console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredviewing position.

Push the video screen down into itslocked position when it is not in use.The screen turns off automatically.

Only the left RSE seatback consolecontains the infrared transmitters forthe wireless headphones, they maybe visible as eight illuminated LEDs.These LEDs are not on the rightvideo screen. Both seatbackconsoles contain an infraredreceiver for the remote control.They are located at the top of eachconsole.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Video Screen Input Jack

Each video screen is equippedwith a video input jack to allowvideo cables to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.This signal will override any videoprovided by the RSE system; eitherthe DVD or Auxiliary A/V jacksource. The RSE system must beon for this input to operate.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at eitherseatback console and press thebutton. Direct sunlight or very brightlight could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. Checkthe batteries if the remote controldoes not seem to be working. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line ofsight could also affect the functionof the remote control.



If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in theRadio DVD slot, the remote controlO button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The infotainment system canalso turn on the video screendisplay. See CD/DVD Player onpage 6‑21 or the separatenavigation system manual formore information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn thevideo screens on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight times out after severalseconds if no other button ispressed.

v (Title): Press to return to themain menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor. After making a selectionpress the enter button. This buttononly operates when using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thehighlighted choice in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press toadjust the brightness, screendisplay mode, and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press to pause aDVD while it is playing. Press againto continue playing.



Depending on the infotainmentsystem in the vehicle, DVDplayback may be slowed down bypressings then[. Reverse

slow play by pressings thenr. Presss again to cancelslow play.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to go to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press togo to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD. Tostop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing a

DVD audio or CD, releaser. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stopfast forwarding a DVD video, presss. To stop fast forwarding a DVDaudio or CD, release[. This buttonmight not work when the DVD isplaying the copyright information orthe previews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe video displays between the DVDplayer and an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to change thecamera angle on DVDs that havethis feature when the DVD isplaying.

\ (Clear) (If Available): Press thisbutton within three seconds afterinputting a numeric selection, toclear all numeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries) (IfAvailable): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbersgreater than 9. Press this buttonbefore inputting the number.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numbered keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.



Replacing the Remote Control

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.Use a Toshiba® code set forreplacement universal remotecontrols.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide back the rear cover on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

Remove the batteries from theremote control if unused for anextended period of time.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not be turnedON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, I pushPlay but sometimes the DVD startswhere I left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed onetime, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen isin the auxiliary source mode bypressing the AUX button on theremote control.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range, andinterference from cellular telephonetowers or by using a cellulartelephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are oncorrectly using the L (left) and R(right) on the headphones.Check that the headphones arepositioned properly with theheadband across the top ofthe head.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player bypressing the AUX button on theremote control.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen may displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error orMechanical Error: There aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error or UnknownFormat: The disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error or Disc Error:The disc is not from a correctregion.

No Disc Inserted: No disc ispresent when theZ EJECT orMEM/DVD/AUX button is pressedon the radio.



DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE SeatbackConsole

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water to clean the RSEseatback console surface.

Cleaning the Video Screens

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whentouching or cleaning the screens asdamage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allow therear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or otherauxiliary sources. RSA can onlycontrol music sources that the frontseat passengers are listening to,except on radios where dual controlis allowed.

RSA can function when the frontradio is off.X displays on theinfotainment system when RSAis on.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment system with wirelessheadphones, audio can also beheard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

To listen to a portable audio devicethrough the RSA, attach theportable audio device to theauxiliary input, if available. Turn thedevice on, then choose the frontauxiliary input with the RSA SRCEbutton.



P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase ordecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right. Use thevolume control on headphones forwireless headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio, CD, and if thesefeatures are available: DVD, frontor rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. Thefront radio may override the rearselection as required.

© ¨ (Seek): While listening to theradio, press to go to the previous orto the next station and stay there.If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

Press and hold © or ¨ until “Tune”

displays. Continue to press © or ¨ totune to an individual station. Tunestays active until © or ¨ has notbeen pressed for several seconds.

If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter ifmore than ten seconds have played.If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios. Pressand hold © or ¨ to fast reverse orfast forward.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to cursor up

or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ tocursor left or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to go tothe next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio, this function may beinactive on some radios.



When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the disc or display discinfo. If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios.

When a disc is playing in the CDor DVD changer, press and holdPROG to select the next disc,if multiple discs are loaded. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto a disc, this function may beinactive on some radios.

The PROG button may be used toaccess the menu of an MP3. Oncein the menu, use © or ¨ to makeselections.

When a DVD video menu isdisplayed, press PROG, or pressand hold PROG to perform themenu function, ENTER.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to controlthe system. The system canbe used while in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe Bluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.

Steering Wheel Controls

b / g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startvoice recognition.

c / $ (End Call / Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 6‑7 .

PHONE: Press to enter the Phonemain menu.



Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Usethe VOL/O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for FederalCommunications Commission andIndustry Canada Standardsinformation.

Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 6‑7 .

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.

See the cell phone manufactureruser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guidefor more information.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability can not be connected tothe vehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.

The pairing process can be startedby using the voice recognitionsystem or the controls on theinfotainment system.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cellphone based on the ordershown in the device list.



. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see “Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four digit PIN number appearson the display.

If the “Add new GPS device”option is selected, the systemwill start a search for Bluetooth“Handsfree” profile devices justlike if “Add new Phone” wasselected . The additional GPSlocation feature which would

provide the vehicle's GPSlocation through the BluetoothSerial Port Profile is notavailable.

5. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberprovided by the system.

6. The system prompts for a namefor the phone and confirms thename provided. This name isused to indicate which phone isconnected.

7. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.



Linking to a Different Phone

In order to link to a different phone,the new phone must be in thevehicle and available to beconnected to the bluetooth systembefore the process is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call

Radio with CD

1. Press the PHONE button twice.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Radio with CD/DVD/MEM

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select Enter number.

3. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.

4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobto “Answer” and press theMENU/SELECT knob to acceptthe call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobto “Decline” and press theMENU/SELECT knob to declinethe call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.



Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECTknob to “Answer” and press theMENU/SELECT knob to acceptthe call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELECT knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press theMENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three waycalling must be supported on thebluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press theMENU/SELECT knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 6‑7 formore information.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELECT knob and chooseMerge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat steps 1through 4. The amount of callersthat can be added are limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SELECTknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press theMENU/SELECT knob and selectEnter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence,see “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.



Bluetooth(Voice Recognition)

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.


A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability can not be paired to thevehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.





. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information changes orthe phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds with a tone. After thetone say “Hands Free”. Thesystem responds “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.



4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cell phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four‐digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. This name will beused to indicate which phone isconnected. The system confirmsthe name.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.




3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.The system will respond “isconnected” if a phone isconnected to the vehicle.




3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to bedeleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system responds“Would you like to delete <phonename>? Yes or No” followed bya tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds “OK,deleting <phone name>”.






3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds “Please waitwhile I search for other phones”.. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tags thatare shared between the Bluetoothand OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory

Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds “Store, number please”followed by a tone.



3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.. If the system recognizes

the number the response is“OK, Storing”.

. If the system does notrecognize the phonenumber, the response is“Store <Phone number>”.“Please say yes or no”.If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.

4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store”. Thesystem responds “Please saythe name tag” followed bya tone.



5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds “Directory” and lists allstored name tags. The systemreturns to the main menu whenthe list is complete.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command is used todelete specific name tags.

To delete name tags:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds “Delete, please saythe name tag” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no”.. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”

Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags forOnStar if stored.



To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. Thesystem responds “You are aboutto delete all name tags stored inyour phone directory and yourroute destination directory. Areyou sure you want to do this?Please say yes or no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds“Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system responds“OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number isnot correct, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.



Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. The system repeats backthe digit it heard followed bya tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. Thesystem responds “OK, Dialing”and dials the number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system responds“Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system recognizes

the name tag it responds“OK, calling, <name tag>”and dials the number.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag, itconfirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, calling, <nametag>” and dials the number.If the name tag is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thename tag again.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the Re‐dial Command

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds with a tone. After thetone say “Hands Free”. Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. Thesystem responds “Re‐dial using<phone name>” and dials thelast number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Pressc / $ to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc / $ to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call press b g. Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three‐way call”.The system responds with“Three‐way call, please saydial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc / $ to end a call.



Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds“Resuming call”.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds “Transferring call” andthe audio transfers to the cellphone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connectionprocess can take up to two minutesafter the key is turned to ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY.

Press b g during a call with theaudio on the cell phone. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.



To access contacts stored in the cellphone:



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>”.. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.


The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and the numbersstored as name tags during a call.Use this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds“Say a number to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.. If the system recognizes

the number it responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the number itresponds “Dial Number,please say yes or no?”followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.



Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds “Say a nametag to send tones” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system recognizes

the number it responds“OK, Sending <name tag>”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag itresponds “Dial <name tag>,please say yes or no?”followed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on Deleting aPaired Phone and DeletingName Tags.



Bluetooth (Navigation)For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, see“Overview” under Introduction, inthe Navigation supplement.

Bluetooth Pairing

To make calls with a Bluetooth cellphone through your vehicle, it mustbe paired to the vehicle's Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.Refer to the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth pairing instructions. If aBluetooth phone is off or notconnected, calls will automaticallybe made using the OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling feature,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more informationabout OnStar Hands-Free Calling.

A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be connected tothe vehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.






. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the vehicle'sBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see “Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton repeatedly until thePhone menu is shown or pressthe Phone tab on the screen.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.



3. Select “Add New Phone”, thepairing process will beginsearching for Bluetooth deviceson your cellular phone. See thecell phone manufacturer's userguide for information on thisprocess.

If the “Add new GPS device”option is selected, the systemwill start a search for Bluetooth“Handsfree” profile devicesjust like if you had selected“Add new Phone”.

The additional GPS locationfeature provides the vehicle'sGPS location through theBluetooth Serial Port Profileis not available.

On the cell phone, locate thedevice name, such as “YourVehicle”. If in another country,the device's name may have aGM acronym for that country.

Follow the instructions given onthe cell phone or follow the voiceprompts, to enter the four digitPIN number that has beenprovided.

4. The system voice promptrequests that you say the nameyou want used for the phone thatis being paired. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. Thesystem voice prompt thenrepeats the name you providedfor confirmation, say “Yes”.

5. The system responds with“phone name has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.




1. Press the CONFIG controlbutton repeatedly until thePhone menu is shown or pressthe Phone tab displayed on thescreen.


3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously pairedphones will be displayed. If there isa currently connected phone, acheck mark will appear on the rightside of the Phone name.






3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deletedand then follow the on screenprompts to delete the devicefrom the system.



5. Once a phone has been deleted,the only way to connect back tothat phone is to pair the phoneagain. See “Bluetooth Pairing”earlier before the process isstarted.


In order to link to a different phone,the new phone must be in thevehicle and available to beconnected to the Bluetooth systembefore the process is started.



3. Select the Device List submenu.



4. Select the phone to be linkedand then follow the on screenprompts.

5. The Phone menu will bedisplayed with the name of thephone linked.

Making a Call

Press 5 located on the faceplate ofthe infotainment system, to accessthe phone menu.

Enter Number

Use this option to enter a phonenumber and make a call. To do this:

1. Press the Enter Numberselection. A dial pad displays onthe Navigation screen.



2. Enter the desired number bytouching the appropriate buttonson the screen or using therotary knob.

3. Press the CALL button to makethe call.

Accepting or Declining anIncoming Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anyaudio being played and sounds aring tone.

Accepting a Call

Press b g on the steering wheelcontrol to answer the incoming callor press the Answer option toanswer the call. Declining a Call

Pressc / $ on the steering wheelcontrols or select the Decline optionto decline the call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Switching Calls (OnlyAvailable with Call Waiting)

This feature allows you to switchbetween calls, making one callactive and placing the other on hold.

Switch Call: Turn or press themenu select knob to “Switch Call”and press Enter or press the“Switch Call” option.

Conference Calling

Conference and three-way callingmust be supported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by the wirelessservice carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Press 5 on the faceplate untilthe Phone main screen is shownwith the current active call.

2. Select the “Enter Number”option.

3. Make another call. The first callwill be placed on hold while thesecond call is dialing andconnected.

4. To make a conference call,select the “Merge Calls” optionwhich will merge both calls intoone conference call.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 2through 4. The amount of callersthat can be added are limited byyour wireless service carrier.



Ending a Call

1. Press the 5 control button.

2. Select Hang Up.

Mute or UnMute a Call


2. Select the Mute call option tomute the call.

3. Select the Mute call option againto unmute the call.


The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call, this isused when calling a menu drivenphone system.


2. Select “Enter Number” optionand enter the number sequence.

The DTMF Tones will be generatedon the network as you enter eachnumber.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. Power

C. AUTO

D. ZONE

E. Defrost

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver and PassengerTemperature Control

H. Driver and Passenger Heatedand Ventilated Seats

I. Air Conditioning


7-2 Climate Controls

J. Recirculation

K. Outside Air

L. Rear Window Defogger

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41.

Q /R (Driver and PassengerTemperature Control): Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature.

ZONE: Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver settings.The ZONE indicator light turns off.When the passenger settings areadjusted, the ZONE indicator lightis on.

Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

D C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic operation and the system

goes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to change the direction of theairflow. The current mode appearsin the display screen. Changing themode cancels the automaticoperation and the system goes intomanual mode. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

C (Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.



- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

8 (Upper): Air is directed to thewindshield outlets.

7 (Hi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield andinstrument panel outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Automatic Air Recirculation:When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

The climate control system mayhave a sensor to detect air pollution.In auto recirculation control, the AirQuality Control system may operate.To adjust the sensitivity of the AirQuality Control, see Climate andAir Quality under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑41.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see Climate and Air Qualityunder Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon outside air. An indicator lightcomes on. Outside air is circulatedthrough the vehicle.



Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about 5 minutes beforeturning off. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation, seeClimate and Air Quality underVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑41. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 40°Fand below. The auto rear defoggerturns off automatically after about10 minutes. At higher speeds, therear window defogger may stay oncontinuously.

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger button is on and helps toclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 1‑22.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs wouldn't becovered by your warranty.

Heated and Ventilated Seats:Press to heat or ventilate the seat.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 2‑10.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver'sprevious settings to heat or coolthe inside of the vehicle. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 1‑9.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensors

The solar sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system usesthe sensor information to adjustthe temperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air deliverymode for best comfort.

If the sensor is covered theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Rear Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they areintegrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

ZONE: When the rear climatecontrol is turned on from the rear,the ZONE indicator light will turn on.Press the ZONE button on the frontclimate control system to turn off therear blower and match the rearsettings to the front. The ZONEindicator light and rear climatecontrol display will turn off.

The rear climate control can beturned off by pressing the C button.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols.

The front climate control systemmust be on for the rear climatecontrol to work. To turn on the rearclimate control from rear seating,press any rear climate controlbutton.

The rear climate control will notwork if the front climate controlsystem is in defrost.



Automatic Operation

AUTO: PressN until the AUTOsetting is selected to control the reartemperature, air delivery, and fanspeed automatically.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons on the rear seat audiocontrol panel to increase ordecrease the airflow. Pressing thefan up button when the system is offwill turn the system on. The airdelivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.

+/− (Temperature Control):Press these buttons to adjust thetemperature of the air flowinginto the passenger area. Press the+ button for warmer air and pressthe − button for cooler air.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the mode button to changethe direction of the airflow in thevehicle. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

Air VentsMove the sliding knob on the airoutlets up and down or left and rightto direct the airflow. Use thethumbwheels near the air outlets toopen or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


Driving and Operating 8-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 8-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 8-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-17Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Starting the GasolineEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 8-25Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 8-33

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 8-35Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 8-37Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 8-37

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-40Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-47Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-47California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-48Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51


8-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.



Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 2‑13.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving. Inrecent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart.



This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson's chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 8‑34 andStabiliTrak® System on page 8‑35.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 4‑23.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as twoor three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it is

pavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake is



applied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 9‑3 .

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking on

page 8‑4 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.



The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if there

is nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose controlof the vehicle. Defensive driversavoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existingconditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids arealways possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.



Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 9‑52.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Be alert —something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 8‑30 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideService on page 12‑6. To get helpand keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as needed towarm the vehicle and then shut theengine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.



Repeat this until help arrives butonly when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 9‑74.

Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 9‑105.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.



Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 9‑52 and TirePressure on page 9‑59.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 8‑56for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg(150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg(150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg (200 lbs)× 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about the

vehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver's door. Thelabel shows the size of thevehicle's original tires and the



inflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.

Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.



The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse – they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as you can.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600miles), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first 1 000 km(600miles) and 5 000 km(3,000 miles), heavyacceleration in lower gearscan be used. Vehicle speedsabove 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 8‑52 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf the vehicle has this feature, theposition of the throttle and brakepedals can be adjusted.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the right side ofthe steering column, below thewiper stalk. Pull the switch towardyou to move the pedals further fromthe floor, or push the switch awayfrom you to move the pedals closerto the floor.

Adjust the throttle and brake pedalswhile the vehicle is in P (Park)without pressing on the pedals. Thepedals cannot be adjusted while thevehicle is in R (Reverse) or whencruise control is engaged. Thethrottle and brake pedals can alsobe adjusted while driving.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with push‐buttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START and STOPPINGTHE ENGINE/OFF.

If the push-button start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless entrysystem. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑29 formore information.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN mode and the brake pedalmust be applied.

STOPPING THE ENGINE/OFF(No LED Lights): When the vehicleis stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn OFF, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 8‑20 formore information.



If the vehicle is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 4‑29 for more information.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 8‑31

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LEDLight): This mode allows you touse some electrical accessorieswhen the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied, will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrun down.

ON/RUN/START (Green LEDLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Gasoline Engineon page 8‑20 for more information.The ignition will then remain inON/RUN.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped). Power outlets under the climate

control system, inside the centerfloor console, and on the rear ofthe center floor console.

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driverdoor is opened.

Power to the power windows,sunroof and outlets under theclimate control system, inside thecenter floor console, and on therear of the center floor console willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All these features will workwhen the vehicle is inON/RUN/START.

Starting the GasolineEnginePlace the transmission in the propergear by moving the shift lever toP (Park) or N (Neutral). To restartthe engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral).

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

The keyless access transmitter mustbe inside the vehicle for the ignitionto work.

Cell phone chargers can interferewith the operation of the KeylessAccess System. Battery chargersshould not be plugged in whenstarting or turning off the engine.

To start the vehicle:

Starting Procedure

1. With the brake pedal applied,press the START button locatedon the instrument panel. SeeIgnition Positions on page 8‑18.

2. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button andthe engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display No RemoteDetected. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑29 formore information.

If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter needsreplacing, the DIC displaysReplace Battery In Remote Key.The vehicle can still be driven.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 1‑3 for more information.



3. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

4. If the engine does not start andno DIC message is displayed,wait 15 seconds before tryingagain to let the cranking motorcool down.

If the engine does not startafter 5-10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below−18°C or 0°F), it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floorwhile cranking for up to15 seconds.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by pressingthe START button immediatelyafter cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage thecranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.

When the engine starts, let go of theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do thesame thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. Once cranking hasbeen initiated, the engine continues

cranking for a few seconds or untilthe vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start, cranking automaticallystops after 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated near the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 8‑31 for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition off.



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, be surethe vehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal.

See if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpulling it toward you. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed toprevent movement of the shift leverout of P (Park), unless the ignition isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYand the brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 9‑101.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 8‑24.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 8‑22.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8‑52.

AutomaticTransmissionThe shift lever is located on thecenter console between the frontseats.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.



P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 8‑22. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8‑52.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 8‑23.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)can be used to rock the vehicleback and forth to get out of snow,ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission. See If the Vehicle isStuck on page 8‑11 for additionalinformation.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. You can also use N (Neutral)when the vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 35 mph

(55 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 35 mph (55 km/h)or more, push the accelerator allthe way down.

The transmission will shift downto a lower gear and have morepower.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see Skidding underLoss of Control on page 8‑6.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. If you are stuck,do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive the vehicle athigh RPMs without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsyou to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive) toM (Manual Mode).

If you do not move the shift leverforward or rearward, the vehiclewill be in Sport Mode. When youare in Sport Mode the vehiclewill still shift automatically. Thetransmission may remain in agear longer than it would in thenormal driving mode based onbraking, throttle input, andvehicle lateral acceleration.

An S will be displayed inthe DIC.

Within Sport Mode there is afurther performance featurecalled Performance Mode LiftFoot (PMLF) Mode. The featureis activated automatically whensports oriented driving isdetected, based on corneringand on/off throttle application.PMLF allows the transmission tohold the current gear instead ofupshifting when the throttle islifted.

2. To enter M (Manual Mode), pressthe shift lever forward to upshiftor rearward to downshift.

An M will be displayed inthe DIC.

The tachometer display on theinstrument panel cluster will showwhich gear the vehicle is in. Thenumber indicates the requestedgear range when moving the shiftlever forward or rearward. SeeTachometer on page 4‑15 for moreinformation.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to down shift for morepower or engine braking.



The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine RPM is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine RPM is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear ratio allows youto gain more traction on slipperysurfaces.

Fuel Economy ModeThe vehicle may have a fueleconomy mode. When engaged,fuel economy mode can improve thevehicle's fuel economy.

Pressing the eco button by the shiftlever will engage fuel economymode. When activated, the eco lightin the instrument cluster will comeon. See Fuel Economy Light onpage 4‑27. Pressing the button asecond time will turn fuel economymode off.

When fuel economy mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner, and downshift later.. The torque converter will

lock–up sooner, and stayon longer.

. The gas pedal will be lesssensitive.

. The vehicle's computers willmore aggressively shut off fuelto the engine under deceleration.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 9‑100 for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 4‑24.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is OFF. To avoiddraining the battery, do not cycle theEPB too often without the enginerunning. The EPB can be leftapplied while the vehicle is parked.

The system has a Park BrakeStatus light and a Park BrakeWarning light. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 4‑23. Thereare also three Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 4‑29 for more information.In case of insufficient electricalpower, the EPB cannot be appliedor released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe park brake status lamp to insurethe park brake is applied.



EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the park brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status lamp will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,you need to have the vehicleserviced. Do not drive the vehicle ifthe park brake status light isflashing. See your dealer. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 4‑23 for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC message“Release Park Brake” will bedisplayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switchis held in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during thedeceleration will release the parkingbrake. If the switch is held in the upposition until the vehicle comes to astop, the EPB will remain applied.

If the park brake status light flashescontinuously, the EPB is onlypartially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message “Service ParkingBrake” will be displayed. If this lightflashes continuously, release theEPB, and attempt to apply it again.If this light continues to flash, do notdrive the vehicle. See your dealer.

If the park brake warning light is on,the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until thepark brake status light remains on.If the park brake warning light is on,see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/RUN position,apply and hold the brake pedal, andpush down momentarily on the EPBswitch. If you attempt to release theEPB without the brake pedalapplied, a chime will sound, and theDIC message “Step On Brake toRelease Park Brake” will bedisplayed. The EPB is releasedwhen the park brake status lightis off.

If the park brake warning light is on,the EPB has detected an error inanother system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.



EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the park brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve park brake lining life.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 8‑52 for more information.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling back.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel spin. On a front-wheel-drivevehicle, the system operates if itsenses that one or both of the frontwheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. Tolimit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, “Service Traction Control” isdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 4‑38.

When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.



Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

d is located on the console.

TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing d. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.

Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press andrelease d again to turn thesystem back on.

When TCS is turned off on AWDvehicles, the system may still makenoise. This is normal and necessarywith AWD hardware.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle is Stuck on page 8‑11 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 8‑9 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 9‑3 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.



TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, “Service StabiliTrak” isdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 4‑38.

When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on, thevehicle needs service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

d is located on the console.

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing andholding d until g and i come onthe instrument panel. WhenStabiliTrak is turned off, the systemwill not assist with directional controlof the vehicle or limit wheel spin.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and released again to turn the system back on.

If cruise control is being usedwhen StabiliTrak activates, cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 8‑37 for more information.



Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand, or gravel. Whentraction is low, this feature allowsthe drive wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle. Thelimited-slip rear axle also gives thedriver enhanced control whencornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change.

Selective Ride ControlThe vehicle may have a ridecontrol system called Selective RideControl. The setting can be changedat any time. Based on roadconditions, steering wheel angleand the vehicle speed, the systemautomatically adjusts to provide thebest handling while providing asmooth ride. The Tour and Sportmodes will feel similar on asmooth road.

To switch from TOUR to SPORTmode, move the shift lever to theleft while the transmission is inD (Drive)

TOUR: Use for normal city andhighway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

SPORT: Use where road conditionsor personal preference demandmore control. This setting providesmore “feel”, or response to roadconditions through increasedsteering effort and suspensioncontrol. Transmission shift pointsand shift firmness are alsoenhanced. See Manual Mode onpage 8‑28 in AutomaticTransmission.

If there is a problem detected withSelective Ride Control, “ServiceSuspension System” displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Ride Control System Messageson page 4‑38. Driving should beadjusted accordingly.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.



If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 8‑35 or TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 8‑34. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused, you can apply the cruisecontrol again.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on and off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed orpress and hold to accelerate.

−SET (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. PressT.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the −SETbutton located on the steeringwheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.



Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the −SET button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the −SET button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. If the brake isapplied the cruise controldisengages.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button on thesteering wheel.

. Press theT button on thesteering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheT button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicFront and Rear Parking Assist(UFRPA) system, it assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects. UFRPA operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph), and thesensors on the front and rearbumper detect objects up to 1.2 m(4 ft) in front of the vehicle and 2.5 m(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Front and RearPark Assist (UFRPA) systemdoes not replace driver vision.It cannot detect:

. objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

. children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore moving forward and whilebacking; vehicle damage, injury,or death could occur. Even withUFRPA, always check in front ofthe vehicle before moving forwardand behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While moving forwardand backing, be sure to look forobjects and check the vehicle'smirrors.

How the System Works

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse) the front and rearsensors are automatically turned on,after the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the rear sensors areturned off and the front sensors stayon until the vehicle is above acertain speed. The front sensorsmay also be turned on by pressingthe park assist button located nextto the shift lever without shifting intoR (Reverse) while the vehicle istraveling at a low speed. See“Turning the System On and Off”later in this section.

When the vehicle is in N (Neutral),the system may be active. If thevehicle is in a car wash, the sensorsmay detect objects in the car wash.See “Turning the System On andOff” later in this section to turn thesystem off.



High-toned beeps heard from thefront speakers are for objectsdetected near the front bumper.Low-toned beeps heard from therear speakers are for objectsdetected near the rear bumper.

When an object is detected, high orlow‐tone beeps are heard. As thevehicle gets closer to an object, thetime between the beeps becomesshorter. When the distance is lessthan 30 cm (11.8 in), beeping iscontinuous. The distance may beless during warmer or humidweather.

PARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that UFRPA is off. Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

Front Display

The front display is located in theinstrument panel in the center of thespeedometer and has four bars toprovide distance and systeminformation.

The following describes how the UFRPA front display lights appear as thevehicle gets closer to a detected object:

Description Metric English

one amber bar 1.2 m 4 ft

two amber bars 1.0 m 40 in

three amber bars 0.6 m 23 in

three amber bars and one red bar 0.3 m 1 ft



Turning the System On and Off

The UFRPA system can be turnedon and off by pressing the parkassist button located next to theshift lever.

The park assist button lights upwhen the system is on and turns offwhen it has been disabled.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If UFRPA does not turn on due to atemporary condition, the messagePARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDIC, and the light on the park assistbutton turns off. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle'sbumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 9‑109.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theattached object is removed,UFRPA will return to normaloperation.

. If an object is attached to thefront of the vehicle.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 25 km/h(15 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

The rear vision camera system canassist the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

An image appears on the navigationscreen with the message “CheckSurroundings for Safety” when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The navigation screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).



Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Camera. When a checkmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.The error message “Rear ParkingAssist Symbols Unavailable” maydisplay if URPA has been disabledand the symbols have been turnedon. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 8‑40.

The symbols appear and maycover an object when viewing thenavigation screen when an object isdetected by the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Symbols. When a checkmark appears next to theSymbols option, symbols willappear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Guidelines. When acheck mark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.

Rear Vision CameraError Messages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay when the system is notreceiving information it requires fromother vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camerais limited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera system maynot work properly or display a clearimage if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.



The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 11‑1.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 3.0L V6 engine(VIN Code Y), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine(VIN Code 4), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Forbest performance, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 93. In anemergency, you can use regularunleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 87 or higher. If 87 octanefuel is used, do not perform anyaggressive driving maneuvers suchas wide open throttle applications.You might also hear audible sparkknock during acceleration. Refill thetank with premium fuel as soon aspossible to avoid damaging theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at91octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 8‑48 for additionalinformation.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4‑20. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.



For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.

However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

When reinstalling the cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks once,otherwise the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp could turn on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4‑20.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 9‑109.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks once. Makesure the cap is fully installed.



The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 4‑20.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type fuel cap might not fitproperly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4‑20.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 9‑105. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

vehicle such as a motorhome, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 9‑105.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 8‑56. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.



. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a StabilityControl System

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.



Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 9‑20.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule for moreinformation. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem and brake system. Inspectthese before and during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 9‑20.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

2.8L Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)

3.0L Engine, FWD 1134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 187 kg (7,025 lbs)

3.0L Engine, FWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 640 kg (8,025 lbs)

3.0L Engine, AWD 1134 kg (2,500 lbs) 3 271 kg (7,212 lbs)

3.0L Engine, AWD with Trailering Package 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 12‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo in

the vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.

It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg(850 lbs)) and because the weight isapplied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, as muchas 1.5 times as much. The weight atthe rear axle could be 386 kg(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).



Since the rear axle already weighs1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg(1,275 lbs) brings the total to1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 136 kg (300 lbs) could beadded to the front axle weight and181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs) and you might think318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)should be subtracted from the

trailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailerwould only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limited toless than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effecton the rear axle must still beconsidered. Because the rear axlenow weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),408 kg (900 lbs) can be put onthe rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actualweight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)of tongue weight that can behandled. Since tongue weight isusually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, expect thatthe largest trailer the vehicle canproperly handle is 2 722 kg(6,000 lbs).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification label or seeVehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11for more information. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight distributing hitch, makesure not to go over the rear axlelimit before applying the weightdistribution spring bars.



Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes later when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 8‑24.

Hitch Cover

The vehicle may have a hitch cover.To remove the hitch cover:

1. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degreescounterclockwise.

2. Lift the lower edge of the coverabout 45 degrees.

3. Pull the cover downward todisengage the upperattachments.

To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Hold the cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs in the hitch coverinto the slots in the fascia.

2. Move the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower fascia slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degrees clockwise tolock the cover in place.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If you do, both brakesystems will not work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

All of the electrical circuits requiredfor the trailer lighting system can beaccessed at a connector mounted tothe frame, behind the rear bumpercover.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If TSC detectsthat the trailer is swaying, thevehicle's brakes are automaticallyapplied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes to notify the driver to reducespeed. See Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 4‑25. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 2‑40 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 2‑41.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 9-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-20Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 9-22Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-28Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-53Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71


9-2 Vehicle Care

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-73Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (Without SelectorSwitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76

Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (With SelectorSwitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 9-100

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-105Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


Vehicle Care 9-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2‑41.


9-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 12‑13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2‑40.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 10‑9.


Vehicle Care 9-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle with theabove symbol on it. It is locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. Move the secondary hoodrelease lever up to release thestriker. The lever is located nearthe middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly.


9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.8 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 9-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9‑14.

B. Power Steering Reservoir andCap. See Power Steering Fluidon page 9‑22.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 9‑10.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10.

E. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 9‑24.

F. Battery (Out of View). SeeBattery on page 9‑27.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 9‑17.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑101.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 9‑101.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 9‑45.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.


9-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 9-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9‑14.

B. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (Under engine cover). SeePower Steering Fluid onpage 9‑22.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 9‑10.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10.

E. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.

F. Transmission Fluid Cap andDipstick. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brakes onpage 9‑24.

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 9‑17.

I. Battery (Out of View). SeeBattery on page 9‑27.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑101.

K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 9‑101.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 9‑45.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.

Engine Cover

Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the engine cover (B) torelease from the retainers.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.


9-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addat least one liter/quart of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 9-11

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:. GM4718M

This vehicle's engine requires aspecial oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified assynthetic. However, not allsynthetic oils will meet this GMstandard. Use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: Using oils that do nothave the GM4718M Standarddesignation can cause enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty.. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

This vehicle's engine was filled atthe factory with a Mobil 1® syntheticoil meeting all requirements for thisvehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When addingoil to maintain engine oil level, oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718Mmight not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30with the starburst symbol at alltemperatures. Substitute oil notmeeting GM Standard GM4718Mshould not be used for an oilchange.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the starburstsymbol that meet GM standards areall that is needed for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


9-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A “Change Engine OilSoon” message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages onpage 4‑36. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 miles). It is possible that,

if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might not indicatethat an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealerhas trained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel on the turn signallever, display “Oil LifeRemaining” on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 4‑29 and Engine OilMessages on page 4‑36.

2. Press the SET button to resetthe oil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.


Vehicle Care 9-13

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the “Change Engine Oil Soon”message is not on, the system isreset.

The system is reset when the“Change Engine Oil Soon” messageis off.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains elementsthat can be unhealthy for your skinand could even cause cancer. Donot let used oil stay on your skin.Clean your skin and nails with soapand water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothingor rags. See the manufacturer'swarnings about the use anddisposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealerservice department. Contact yourdealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 12‑13.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑6.


9-14 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10‑2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required. Never use compressedair to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9‑5 .

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe front of the passenger sideof the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 .

3.0 L V6 Shown, 2.8 L V6 Similar

A. Air Duct Clamp

B. Electrical Connectors

C. Retaining Clips

3. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (A).

4. Disconnect the electricalconnectors (B).

5. Lift the retaining clips (C) on theair filter housing.


Vehicle Care 9-15

6. Turn and tilt cover slightlyupwards and slide cover awayfrom outside edge of vehicle.Remove the air filter.

A. Cover Cut Outs

B. Air Filter Tabs

7. To install the air filter, place filterinside box where the pleats fit inbetween the tabs located insidethe lower box. Ensure that thecover cut outs (A) on both sidesmatch the air filter tabs (B) onboth sides.

8. Replace air cleaner cover byinserting tabs appropriately intoslots. Lower cover to meetbottom of box. Place clips onretention features and clipclosed.

9. Retighten the air duct clamp.

10. Reconnect the electricalconnectors.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Notice: Installing an aircleaner different than the onerecommended in MaintenanceReplacement Parts may causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


9-16 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemWhen it is safe to lift the hood:

3.0 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.8 LV6 Engine Similar

A. Engine Cooling Fans

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, the vehicle may have aleak at the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.


Vehicle Care 9-17

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, theengine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000 miles),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 9‑20

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.


9-18 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.See Engine Overheating onpage 9‑20 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for more information onlocation.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check tosee if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat the indicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 9-19

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

2.8 L V6 Engine

3.0 L V6 Engine

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure stillleft to be vented out thedischarge hose.


9-20 Vehicle Care

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL® coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature warning light on thevehicle's instrument panel. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 4‑17.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Service onpage 12‑6.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 9-21

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbing a long hill on a hot day.. Stopping after high-speed

driving.. Idling for long periods in traffic.. Towing a trailer.

If the overheat warning displays withno sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.


9-22 Vehicle Care

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine untilit cools down.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system orunusual noise is heard. A fluid lossin this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover,if required. See Engine Coveron page 9‑9 .

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be within the HOTmark. If necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level withinthe mark.


Vehicle Care 9-23

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluidup to the fill mark. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


9-24 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 11‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.


Vehicle Care 9-25

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


9-26 Vehicle Care

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 4‑23.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑6.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


Vehicle Care 9-27

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 9‑101 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

The transfer case is filled with oilduring manufacture, which thendoes not require changing. It is notnecessary to regularly check thetransfer case fluid unless there is aleak suspected or an unusual noiseis heard. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. It is recommended tohave the transfer case serviced atyour dealer by trained servicetechnicians.


9-28 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 8‑31.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 9-29

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 10‑2 for more information.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 10‑8.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool undercover and push upward tounsnap.


9-30 Vehicle Care

2. Slide cover towards wiper bladetip to unhook from bladeassembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that cover hook slidesinto slot in blade assembly.

5. Snap cover down to secure.

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

A. Wiper Arm

B. Release Lever

C. Blade Assembly

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade assembly (C).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace wiper cover.


Vehicle Care 9-31

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampscan be affected and adjustmentcould be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealeradjust the headlamps. To re-aim theheadlamps yourself, use thefollowing procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:. The vehicle should be placed so

the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)from a light‐colored wall.

. The vehicle must have all fourtires on a level surface which islevel all the way to the wall.

. The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall.

. The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

. The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all other workstopped while headlamp aimingis being performed.

. The vehicle should be normallyloaded with a full tank of fuel andone person or 75 kg (160 lbs)sitting on the driver seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.


9-32 Vehicle Care

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9‑5 for more information.

Base Vehicle

Up-level Vehicle

2. Locate the aim point at thecenter inner projectorcondensing lens of the low-beamheadlamp, not the outer lens.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.


Vehicle Care 9-33

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampadjusters, which are under thehood near each headlampassembly.

For the vehicle equipped with abase level lamp (halogen bulb),there will be one verticalheadlamp adjuster (V1).

For the vehicle equipped with anup-level headlamp (HID), therewill be two vertical headlampadjusters (V1 and V2).

Some vehicles have funnel‐shaped caps on the adjusters foreasier access of a Number 2Phillips screwdriver to turn theadjusters.


9-34 Vehicle Care

8. For the base vehicle, turn thevertical adjuster (V1) until theheadlamp beam is aimed to thehorizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwiseto raise or lower the angle ofthe beam.

For the up-level vehicle, turn thevertical adjusters (V1 and V2)simultaneously until theheadlamp beam is aimed to thehorizontal tape line. Turn themclockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle ofthe beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 9‑43.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


Vehicle Care 9-35

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

The up‐level vehicle has HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, the beammight be a slightly different shadethan it was originally. This is normal.

Headlamps

Base Headlamp Assembly(Front View Passenger Side)

A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)

B. High‐Beam Headlamp

C. Turn Signal Lamp

Base Headlamp Assembly(Rear View Passenger Side)

A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL)

B. High‐Beam Headlamp

C. Turn Signal Lamp


9-36 Vehicle Care

Up–Level Headlamp Assembly(Front View Driver Side)

A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp(To be replaced at dealer only)

B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)

C. Turn Signal Lamp

Up–Level Headlamp Assembly(Rear View Driver Side)

A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp(To be replaced at dealer only)

B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)

C. Turn Signal Lamp

Driver Side

The removal of the underhoodelectrical center is required for thereplacement of one of these bulbs:


{ WARNING

Liquids from environment orspillage and/or tools placed ontop of or used in the underhoodelectrical center while the coveris removed can pose a risk ofelectrical shock/burn to anyone inthe vicinity. These conditions canalso cause damage to electricalcomponents on the vehicle. Keepliquids and tools away from theunderhood electrical center whenthe cover is removed.


Vehicle Care 9-37

2. Unlatch three clips and lift up theunderhood electrical centercover to remove.

Passenger Side

The removal of the air filter/cleanerassembly and base is required forthe replacement of one of thesebulbs:


A. Air Duct Clamp

B. Connector Lock

C. Sensor Connectors

D. Retaining Clips

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (A).

3. Remove the connector lock (B)located at the bottom of thesensor connector (C).

4. Press on the top and bottom ofthe sensor connectors (C) andremove.

5. Lift the three retaining clips (D)on the air filter housing.

6. Turn and tilt cover slightlyupwards and slide cover awayfrom outside edge of vehicle. Liftthe cover away from base.

7. Lift the air cleaner/filter base todisengage from three pins.


9-38 Vehicle Care

Low-Beam Headlamps/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL),High-Beam Headlamps (Base)

1. Remove the top cap for thelow-beam headlamp/DRL bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

2. Remove the bottom cap for thehigh-beam headlamp bulbreplacement from the back of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Disconnect electrical connector.

4. Remove the bulb socket fromthe headlamp assembly.

5. Replace the bulb in the bulbsocket.

6. Install the bulb socket in theheadlamp assembly.

7. Connect the electrical connector.

8. Install the cap with the downarrow pointing down in the backof the headlamp assembly.

9. For driver side, reinstall theunderhood electrical centercover by latching three clips.

10. For passenger side, reinstallthe air filter/cleaner assemblybase by pushing to seat. Verifythe base is seated securely,then install the engine airfilter/cleaner assembly.

High/Low‐Beam Headlamps(Up-Level)

The high/low beam headlamps onthe up-level are High IntensityDischarge (HID) and should bereplaced at the dealer.


Vehicle Care 9-39

Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)(Up-Level)

To replace the Front TurnSignal Lamp:

1. Remove the bottom cap for theDRL bulb replacement from theback of the headlamp assembly.

2. Disconnect electrical connector.

3. Remove the DRL bulb socketfrom the headlamp assembly.



6. Connect the electrical connector.

7. Install the cap with the downarrow pointing down in the backof the headlamp assembly.



Front Turn Signal Lamp(Base and Up-Level)

To replace the Front TurnSignal Lamp:

1. Remove the turn signal lampbulb socket from the headlampassembly.

2. Remove the turn signal lampbulb from the socket.






9-40 Vehicle Care

Turn Signal LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 1‑13 orLiftgate (Power) on page 1‑14.

A. Push Pin

B. Taillamp Cover

2. Pull on push pin (A) to releasethe taillamp cover (B).

3. Remove the taillamp cover fromthe lamp assembly by pullingrearward from the top tounfasten from snap tabs.

4. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

5. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.

A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. Back-Up Bulb/Socket

6. Turn the turn signal lamp (A)bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillampassembly.

7. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.


Vehicle Care 9-41

8. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert it into the taillampassembly and turn the bulbsocket clockwise until it clicks.

9. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

10. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.

11. Push the push pin to securethe taillamp cover.

Back-Up LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:


A. Push Pin

B. Taillamp Cover

2. Pull on push pin (A) to releasethe taillamp cover (B).

3. Remove the taillamp cover fromthe lamp assembly by pullingrearward from the top tounfasten from snap tabs.

4. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

5. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.


9-42 Vehicle Care

A. Turn Signal Lamp

B. Back–Up Bulb/Socket

6. Disconnect the wireharness from the back–upbulb/socket (B).

7. Turn the back–up bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

8. Press a new bulb/socket into thetaillamp assembly and turn thebulb/socket clockwise until itclicks.

9. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

10. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.

11. Push the push pin to securethe taillamp cover.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 1‑13 orLiftgate (Power) on page 1‑14for more information.

Passenger side shown, driver sidesimilar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly towards the right.

3. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove from liftgate.


Vehicle Care 9-43

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove fromlamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall into lamp assembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

DaytimeRunning Lamp

7443

Fog Lamp H10

HeadlampHigh-Beam

9005

HeadlampLow-Beam

H10

License Plate Lamp 194

Turn Signal Front 7440

Tail/TurnSignal Rear

7440

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


9-44 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.


Vehicle Care 9-45

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 9‑45 and Rear CompartmentFuse Block on page 9‑49.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockTo remove the fuse block cover,press the clips on the cover and liftit straight up.

The vehicle might not have all thefuses and features listed.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Wiper

12 Vacuum Pump

24Anitlock BrakeSystem Pump

J-CaseFuses

Usage

25Rear ElectricalCenter 1

26Rear ElectricalCenter 2

27 Not Used


9-46 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

41 Cooling Fan 2

42 Starter

43 Not Used

44 Not Used

45 Cooling Fan 1

59SecondaryAIR Pump

Mini Fuses Usage

1Engine ControlModule Battery

2TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

3Mass Air FlowSensor

4 Not Used

5Engine ControlModule Run Crank

Mini Fuses Usage

7Post–CatalyticConverter O2Sensor

8Pre–CatalyticConverter O2Sensor

9Engine ControlModule Powertrain

10 Fuel Injectors–Even

11 Fuel Injectors–Odd

13 Washer

16

Instrument PanelCluster/MalfunctionIndicator Lamp/Ignition

17 Air Quality Sensor

18 Headlamp Washer

19TransmissionControl Module RunCrank

20Rear ElectricalCenter Run Crank

Mini Fuses Usage

23 Heater Motor

30 Switch Back Light

32Battery Sense(Regulated VoltageControl)

33

Adaptive ForwardLighting / AdaptiveHeadlamp LevelingModule

34Body ControlModule 7

35 Electronic BrakeControl Module

46Low BeamHeadlamp‐Right

47Low BeamHeadlamp‐Left

50 Front Fog Lamps

51 Horn

52Fuel System ControlModule


Vehicle Care 9-47

Mini Fuses Usage

53 Headlamp Level

54Sensing DiagnosticModule Ignition

55High BeamHeadlamp–Right

56High BeamHeadlamp–Left

57Ignition SteeringColumn Lock

65Trailer RightStop Lamp

66 Trailer LeftStop Lamp

67 Spare

Mini Fuses Usage

68 Spare

69 Spare

70 Spare

71 Spare

72 Spare

Mini Relays Usage

7 Powertrain

9 Cooling Fan 2

13 Cooling Fan 1

15 Run/Crank

16SecondaryAIR Pump

MicroRelays

Usage

2 Vacuum Pump

4 Wiper Control

5 Wiper Speed

10 Starter

12 Cool Fan 3

14 Low Beam/HID

U MicroRelays

Usage

8 Headlamp Washer


9-48 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated in the center consolebetween the driver and passengerseats. To access the fuses, openthe fuse panel door from thepassenger side by pulling it out.

To reinstall the door, push the doorback into its original location.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Mini Fuses Usage

DISPLY Display

S/ROOF Sun Roof

SPARE Spare

UHPUniversalHandsfree Phone

RDO Radio

APO ‐ IPAuxiliary PowerOutlet ‐ InstrumentPanel

APO ‐ CNSLAuxiliary PowerOutlet ‐ FloorConsole

BCM 3Body ControlModule 3



ONSTAR OnStar® System


Vehicle Care 9-49

Mini Fuses Usage

RAIN SNSR Rain Sensor


ESCLElectronic SteeringColumn Lock

AIRBAGSensing andDiagnostic Module

DLCData LinkConnection

IPCInstrument PanelCluster

SPARE Not Used



Mini Fuses Usage

AMP/RDO Amplifier/Radio

HVACHeating Ventilation& Air Conditioning

J—CaseFuses

Usage


FRT BLWR Front Blower

Relays Usage

LOGIC RLY Logistics Relay

RAP/ACCY RLY

RetainedAccessory Power/Accessory Relay

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated in the cargo area, on thedriver side of the vehicle behind thelower trim panel. To open, turn thelatch with a flat bladed tool and pullthe trim panel from the edges to foldit down.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses and relaysshown.


9-50 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

Fuses Usage

SPAREFUSES

Spare Fuses

AOS MDLAutomatic OccupantSensing Module

SPARE Not Used

SPARE Not Used

SPARE Not Used

PASS DRWDO SW

Passenger DoorWindow Switch

DRVPWR SEAT

Driver Power Seat

PASS DRPWR SEAT

Passenge/DriverPower Seats

MDL TRLR Trailer Module

RPA MDLRear Parking AssistModule

RDM Rear Drive Module

PRKLPS TRLR

Trailer Park Lamps

FUELPUMP

Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

* SEC Security

INFOTMNT Infotainment

* TRLR EXP Trailer Export

WPR REAR Rear Wiper

MIRWDO MDL

Mirror WindowModule

* SPARE Not Used

CNSTRVENT Canister Vent

LGMLOGIC

Lift Gate ModuleLogic

CAMERA Rear Vision Camera

FRTVENT SEAT

Front VentilatedSeats

TRLR MDL Trailer Module

SADS MDLSemi ActiveDamping SystemModule

RRHTD SEAT Rear Heated Seats


Vehicle Care 9-51

Fuses Usage

FRTHTD SEAT

Front Heated Seats

THEFTHORN

Theft Horn

* LGATE Liftgate

REARDEFOG

Rear Defog

* BCMTHEFT

Body ControlModule Theft

* TRLR 2 Trailer 2

UGDOUniversal GarageDoor Opener

RT WDO Right Window

PRKBRK MDL

Park Brake Module

Fuses Usage

SPARE Not Used

LT WDO Left Window

IGN/THEFT 1

Ignition/Theft 1

LGATEMDL

Liftgate Module

IGN/THEFT 2

Ignition/Theft 2

SPARE Not Used

HTD MIR Heated Mirror

AUX PWRAuxiliary PowerOutlet

Relays Usage

SPARE Not Used

* FUELPUMP

Fuel Pump

WPRCONTRL Wiper Control

* RUN RLY Run Relay

LOGIC Logistic Relay

DEFOGREAR

Rear WindowDefogger

*‐Denotes up‐level content.


9-52 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑11.

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold. See TirePressure on page 9‑59.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, puncturedor broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 9‑60 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed driving.


Vehicle Care 9-53

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is the

Tire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9‑71.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


9-54 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air and

gone flat. If your vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 9‑100 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 9‑74.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 9‑59.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.


Vehicle Care 9-55

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


9-56 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 9‑59.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑11.


Vehicle Care 9-57

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑11.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 9‑59 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11.


9-58 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 9‑68.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 9‑71.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑11.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑11.


Vehicle Care 9-59

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Too much flexing. Too much heat. Tire overloading. Premature orirregular wear

. Poor handling

. Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage fromroad hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑11. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


9-60 Vehicle Care

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 9‑100.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under‐inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.


Vehicle Care 9-61

Vehicles with P235/65R18, P235/55R20, or 235/55R20 size tiresrequire inflation pressure adjustmentwhen driving your vehicle at speedsof 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressure to themaximum inflation pressure shownon the tire sidewall, or 44 psi(300 kPa), whichever is lower. Whenyou end this high-speed driving,return the tires to the cold tireinflation pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11and Tire Pressure on page 9‑59.

You will find the maximum load andinflation pressure molded on thetire's sidewall, in small letters,near the rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


9-62 Vehicle Care

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9‑62 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 9-63

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑11.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)display. The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. Usingthe DIC, tire pressure levels can beviewed by the driver. For additional

information and details about theDIC operation and displays seeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 4‑29.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑11, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 9‑59.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 9‑66, Tire Rotation onpage 9‑66 and Tires on page 9‑52.

Notice: Using non‐approved tiresealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use theGM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (Without SelectorSwitch) on page 9‑76 or TireSealant and Compressor Kit (WithSelector Switch) on page 9‑84 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.


9-64 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off onceyou re‐install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 9‑68.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


Vehicle Care 9-65

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing the

tire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gauge, or a key.

You have two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the firsttire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle power mode inON/RUN/START. See IgnitionPositions on page 8‑18.

3. Select the vehicle informationmenu using the menu button.

4. Select the tire pressure screenusing the up/down thumbwheel.

5. Press and hold SET to begin thesensor matching process.

6. Press SET to confirm selection.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.


9-66 Vehicle Care

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Press STOP to turn theignition off.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

14. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage. See When ItIs Time for New Tires onpage 9‑68 for more information.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to8,000 miles). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.


Vehicle Care 9-67

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 9‑68 and WheelReplacement on page 9‑73.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 9‑59 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑11.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 9‑62.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9‑74.


9-68 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) orless of tread remaining.

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, even if itis not being used. Multipleconditions affect how fast this agingtakes place, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. With propercare and maintenance tires typically

wear out before they degrade due toage. If you are unsure about theneed to replace the tires as they getolder, consult the tire manufacturerfor more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, whenit was new, were designed tomeet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.


Vehicle Care 9-69

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 9‑53for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

See Tire Inspection on page 9‑66and Tire Rotation on page 9‑66for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 9‑100.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radialand bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.


9-70 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 9‑61.

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading InformationLabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑11, for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information Label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 9‑68 and Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 9-71

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


9-72 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


Vehicle Care 9-73

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, andtire or tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 9‑74 for more information.


9-74 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go.


Vehicle Care 9-75

It may be very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairsis dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 5‑5.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. Youand they could be badly injured oreven killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 9‑93. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit(Without Selector Switch) onpage 9‑76 or Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (With SelectorSwitch) on page 9‑84.


9-76 Vehicle Care

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit(Without Selector Switch)

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,see the operating instructions thatfollow.

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,follow the operating instructionsunder "Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (With SelectorSwitch).”


Vehicle Care 9-77

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Donot exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside Service onpage 12‑6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


9-78 Vehicle Care

The kit includes:

A. Air Compressor

B. Tire Sealant Canister

C. Power Plug

D. On/Off Button

E. Pressure Gauge

F. Air Only Hose (Black)

G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.


Vehicle Care 9-79

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 9‑93.

Make sure the on/off button (D)is in the off (O) position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)and the power plug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 4‑11.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (E) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.


9-80 Vehicle Care

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gauge (E).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 9‑59.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor ison. Turn the compressor off toget an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideService on page 12‑6.

10. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 11 through17 must be done immediatelyafter Step 10.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/air hose(G), and the power plug (C)back in their original location.


Vehicle Care 9-81

15. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (B) and placeit in a highly visible location.

The label is a reminder not toexceed 55 mph (90 km/h) untilthe damaged tire is repaired orreplaced.

16. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Service onpage 12‑6.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from therecommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (B) and sealant/airhose (G) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 100 miles (161 km) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.


9-82 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:



2. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) fromthe air compressor (A).



6. Remove the tire valve stem capby turning it counterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) ontothe tire valve stem and press thelever down to secure it.

8. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 4‑11.





10. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.


Vehicle Care 9-83

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (E). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 9‑59.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

12. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.


13. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air onlyhose (F) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F)and the power plug (C) back inits original location.

16. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)from the compressor (A).


9-84 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the sealant canister (B) sothe inflator filling hose is alignedwith the slot in the compressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (B) fromthe compressor and replace witha new sealant canister. See yourdealer for more information.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (B)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air compressor inflatorhose (F) onto the sealantcanister inlet and push thelever down.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit(With Selector Switch)

System Identification

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,see the operating instructions thatfollow.


Vehicle Care 9-85

If the vehicle has the tire sealantand compressor kit shown above,follow the operating instructionsunder “Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (Without Selector Switch).

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Donot exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehiclecould cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store thetire sealant and compressor kit inits original location.


9-86 Vehicle Care

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside Service onpage 12‑6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes: A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug


Vehicle Care 9-87

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74.Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.


2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).



4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.


9-88 Vehicle Care

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 4‑11.





8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to the Sealant+ Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 9‑59.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideService on page 12‑6.

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.



Vehicle Care 9-89

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the power plug(H) back in their originallocation.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location.

The label is a reminder not toexceed 55 mph (90 km/h) untilthe damaged tire is repaired orreplaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside Service onpage 12‑6.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from therecommended inflationpressure, inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 100 miles (161 km) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.


9-90 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:



2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).



4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.


Vehicle Care 9-91

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets onpage 4‑11.





8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 9‑59.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (D), if equipped, untilthe proper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.


12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.


9-92 Vehicle Care

13. Disconnect the air only hose(G) from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its originallocation.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.


Vehicle Care 9-93

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit

With Selector Switch

Without Selector Switch

This vehicle may have a tire sealantand compressor kit in place of ajack or spare tire. It is located in afoam container in the rearcompartment storage area. SeeCargo Management System onpage 3‑5 .

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:


2. Press on the bottom of thehandle assembly to unlatch itand lift up on the handle.

The prop rod locks into placewhen open.


9-94 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the spare tire cover. 4. Remove the nut retaining thespare tire.

5. Remove the spare tire and placeit next to the tire being changed.

6. Remove the wing nut (D).

7. Remove the extension (A),jack (B) and wheel wrench (C)and place them near the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 9-95

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Take off the wheel cover or centercap, if the vehicle has one, to reachthe wheel bolts.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 9‑74 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.

Do not try to remove plastic capsfrom the cover or center cap.

3. Pull the cover or center capaway from the wheel. Store thewheel cover in the cargo areauntil you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

6. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.

The jacking location is indicatedby a V-shaped notch in theplastic molding. The jack mustnot be used in any otherposition.


9-96 Vehicle Care

7. Insert the hooked end of theextension handle through thejack and the flat end through thewheel wrench.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

8. Turn the extension with thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe jack lift head until the jackjust fits under the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 9-97

9. Raise the vehicle by turning thewheel wrench clockwise until theslots in the jack head fit into themetal flange located behind thetriangle on the plastic moulding.

Notice: Using a jack to raise thevehicle without positioning itcorrectly could damage yourvehicle. When raising yourvehicle on a jack, be sure toposition it correctly under theframe and avoid contact with theplastic molding.

10. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

rust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9‑74.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.


9-98 Vehicle Care

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 11‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.


Vehicle Care 9-99

When reinstalling the wheel coveror center cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them withthe wheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 1‑13 orLiftgate (Power) on page 1‑14for more information.

2. Put back all tools as they werestored in the rear storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on. Formore information, see “Storingthe Compact Spare Tire andTools” next in this section.

3. Install the cargo cover. For moreinformation, see CargoManagement System onpage 3‑5 .

4. Place the tire, lying flat, in therear storage compartment.

5. Attach the strap to the cargotie-down in the rear of thevehicle.


9-100 Vehicle Care

6. Route the strap through thewheel, as shown.

7. Attach the strap to the othercargo tie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

8. Tighten the strap.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-size

tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


Vehicle Care 9-101

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 9‑27.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the transmissionin P (Park) before setting theparking brake.


9-102 Vehicle Care

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks,helping save both batteries andthe radio.

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Open the hood on your vehicleand find the remote positive (+)and remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminals.

Your vehicle is equipped with aremote positive (+) terminal (A)and a remote negative (−)terminal (B). The remotepositive (+) terminal is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle, abovethe rear of the battery. Theremote negative (−) terminal is astud located in the enginecompartment on the driver sideof the vehicle, on the front tiebar. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 9‑6 formore information on location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal, lift open theaccess panel on the batterycover indicated by the (+) sign.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


Vehicle Care 9-103

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldalso be damaged.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts.Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.


9-104 Vehicle Care

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away from thedead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remote (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal


Vehicle Care 9-105

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Close the access panel on thebattery cover, if applicable.

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with all fourwheels off the ground. Consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

To tow the vehicle behindanother vehicle for recreationalpurposes — such as behind amotorhome, see RecreationalVehicle Towing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.


9-106 Vehicle Care

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

Vehicles with an 2.8 L V 6 enginecan be dinghy towed only forservice and are restricted to amaximum distance of 100 km(60 miles) and not to exceed80 km/h (50 mph).

Vehicles with the 3.0 L V 6 enginecan be dinghy towed withoutdistance restrictions.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Open the drivers door.


Vehicle Care 9-107

3. With the vehicle OFF, press thebrake pedal and press theSTART/STOP switch to start theengine (the green LED on theswitch will illuminate).

4. Put the vehicle in N (Neutral).

5. Press the START/STOP switchagain. The engine will stop, theDIC will display Shift to Park andthe amber LED on the switchilluminates. See TransmissionMessages on page 4‑40.

6. Remove the following fuses:BCM 1, BCM 2 and BCM 3. TheSTART/STOP switch LED's willbe off. See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 9‑48.

7. Close the drivers door.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:

1. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).

2. Reinstall the BCM fuses. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 9‑48.

3. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front. See Dinghy Towingearlier in this section.


9-108 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 8‑22.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 9-109

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


9-110 Vehicle Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal, or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct productusage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 10‑6.


Vehicle Care 9-111

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.


9-112 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


Vehicle Care 9-113

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage can

result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.


9-114 Vehicle Care

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.


Vehicle Care 9-115

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.


9-116 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the

appearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Service and Maintenance 10-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-9

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.

Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑11.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 8‑47.


10-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 9‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as, up todate tools and equipment to ensurefast and accurate diagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 10‑8. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performedwhen they have 8 000 to 13 000 km(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See TireRotation on page 9‑66.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 9‑10. AnEmission Control Service.

When the “Change Engine OilSoon” message displays, serviceis required for the vehicle assoon as possible, within the next1 000 km/600 miles. If driving underthe best conditions, the engine oillife system might not indicate theneed for vehicle service for morethan a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and the oil life system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice technicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 9‑12.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.An Emission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 9‑17.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspection ofhoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 9‑109. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 9‑29.

. Tire inflation check. See TirePressure on page 9‑59.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 9‑66.

. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 9‑66.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9‑14.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, foldingseat hardware, and sunroof(if equipped) lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑6. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 2‑26.

. Automatic transmission fluidlevel check and adding fluid,if needed. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.



Additional Required Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 9‑10.. Engine coolant level check.

See Engine Coolant onpage 9‑17.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑23.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 9‑59.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 9‑66.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 9‑28.. See Park Brake and P (Park)

Mechanism Check onpage 9‑28.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit, check thesealant expiration date printedon the instruction label of thekit. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (WithoutSelector Switch) on page 9‑76or Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (With Selector Switch) onpage 9‑84.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.. Passenger compartment air

filter replacement (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be required if vehicle isdriven regularly under dustyconditions.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9‑14.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, inhilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service).See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 9‑13.

. Spark plug replacement. AnEmission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill, cooling systemand cap pressure check, andcleaning of outside of radiatorand air conditioning condenser(or every 5 years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 9‑16. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage andreplacement, if needed. AnEmission Control Service.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.Oils meeting this standard can be identified with the American PetroleumInstitute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However,not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GMstandard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 9‑17.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88863461,in Canada 88863462).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission(3.0L V6 Engine)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission(2.8L V6 Engine)

AW‐1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 19256039,in Canada 19256040).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Door, and Folding Seat HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668,in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20897358 A3147C

Engine Oil Filter

2.8L V6 Engine 12593333 PF457G

3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176

Spark Plugs

2.8L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41–109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 25979378 —

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 25979379 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 20825882 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading













Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 11‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located underthe hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.8L V6 Engine 12.4 L 13.1 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 11.9 L 12.6 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.8L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 79.5 L 21.0 gal


Technical Data 11-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid

2.8L V6 6–Speed Automatic (Transmission RequiresNo Fluid Replacement)

— —

3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* (Drain and Refill) 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.8L V6 (LAU) 4 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

3.0L V6 (LF1) Y Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)


11-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.8L, 3.0L V6 Engines


Customer Information 12-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 12-13

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-16OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the generalmanager.


12-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the United States,call the Cadillac CustomerAssistance Center, 24 hours a day,at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, callthe Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre at1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairsor the interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Althoughyou may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution programprior to filing a court action, use ofthe program is free of charge and

your case will generally be heardwithin 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter the following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two.General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargemediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe

our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French), or writeto the Mediation/Arbitration Programat the following address:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1–163–0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112



From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0805Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Cadillac Owner Center(U.S.) —www.cadillacownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records. Cadillac dealer locator for

service nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries



Other Helpful Links:

Cadillac — www.cadillac.com

Cadillac Merchandise —www.cadillaccollection.com

Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save detailssuch as address and phonenumber for each of yourpreferred GM dealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceIn the United States or Canada,call 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,call 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Service is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.



. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Serviceto change a flat tire with sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is yourresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed duringthe 5 years/160 000 km(100,000 miles) Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto clubor towing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contacting aCadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.

A dealer technician will travelto your location within a 30 mileradius of a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.

Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools requiredto handle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, anda copy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideService advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside Serviceadvisor may give you permissionto get local emergency roadservice. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered,however any cost for parts andlabor for repairs not covered bythe warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising yourservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada), extended powertrain,and/or hybrid‐specific warrantiesin both the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenienceby providing several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursementwill be limited and must besupported by original receipts.This requires that you sign andcomplete a rental agreement andmeet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit premature

durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.



If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service on page 12‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 2‑34.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance companymay initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if your vehicle is leased, you may be



obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handlingand shipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handlingand shipping fees



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in additionto notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short periodof time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped withan active OnStar system, thatsystem may also record data incrash or near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-41

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-14Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Airbag System (cont.)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-34

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-30AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-19Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-30, 9-27AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-39

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-113

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-25Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-34


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-29Bluetooth . . . . 6-47, 6-48, 6-52, 6-63BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35

Bulb Replacement (cont.)High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-42Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-48Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13, 1-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-20CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-52

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57, 2-59Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-50


INDEX i-3

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-113

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 9-100Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76, 9-84

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 12-13

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-16Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-34Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .2-13

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . .8-30, 9-27

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

DrivingBetter Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 8-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9


i-4 INDEX

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

EECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29

Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 4-24Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Cooling System Messages . . .4-35Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Gasoline Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-25

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-16Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . .9-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .2-10

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.)Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-48Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-47Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-27Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47Requirements, California . . . . .8-48System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . . 4-16Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47

Gasoline Engine, Starting . . . . . . 8-20GaugeTurbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . .10-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-28High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-29Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12


i-6 INDEX

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . 9-60Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 8-8Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-33Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-37Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-53Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37LampsCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-20On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . .1-13, 1-14

LightElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .4-24StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12LightingAdaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-26Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-17Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 8-37LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-27Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-20Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-39Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-35Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Object Detection System . . . . .4-38Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-38

Messages (cont.)Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18


i-8 INDEX

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

NetCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-43Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20OverviewInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-5

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-24Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-36Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 9-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . 6-47, 6-48,

6-52, 6-63PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-20Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-17

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-9

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-17Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17


INDEX i-9

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rear AxleLimited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Rear Climate Control System . . . 7-5Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .6-45

Rear SeatPass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-43Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-9Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-42Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 12-15General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-37Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-27Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-26


i-10 INDEX

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 12-15General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-76, 9-84SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 2-59

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 8-37ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20Maintenance Records . . . . . . . .10-9Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-25StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Starting the GasolineEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

StorageMass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Cargo Management System . . . 3-5Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93


INDEX i-11

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-19Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 2-7Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74

Tires (cont.)Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-62Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-61Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . .9-76, 9-84

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-73When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-52Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-60General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-52Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 9-105Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-61Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-34Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-37Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .8-37

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-61

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9


i-12 INDEX

Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-40Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71

Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-48Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . .9-93

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

WWarning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 4-41Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-29WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Automotive

2010 Cadillac SRX Owners Manual